HP Hewlett Packard Color LaserJet CM1312nfi MFP User Manual

HP Color LaserJet CM1312 MFP Series  
User Guide  
HP Color LaserJet CM1312 MFP Series  
User Guide  
Copyright and License  
Trademark Credits  
Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are  
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
© 2008 Copyright Hewlett-Packard  
Development Company, L.P.  
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation  
without prior written permission is prohibited,  
except as allowed under the copyright laws.  
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows®XP  
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation.  
The information contained herein is subject  
to change without notice.  
Windows Vista™ is either a registered  
trademark or trademark of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
The only warranties for HP products and  
services are set forth in the express warranty  
statements accompanying such products  
and services. Nothing herein should be  
construed as constituting an additional  
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical  
or editorial errors or omissions contained  
herein.  
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open  
Group.  
Edition 2 04/2009  
Part number: CC430-90975  
Table of contents  
2 Control panel  
3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
iii  
4 Use the product with Macintosh  
5 Connectivity  
6 Paper and print media  
7 Use product features  
iv  
ENWW  
8 Print tasks  
9 Copy  
10 Color for Windows  
ENWW  
v
11 Scan  
12 Fax (fax models only)  
vi  
ENWW  
13 Photo  
14 Manage and maintain the product  
15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
vii  
Appendix A Supplies and accessories  
Appendix B Service and support  
Appendix C Specifications  
viii  
ENWW  
Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
ix  
x
ENWW  
1 Product basics  
ENWW  
1
   
Product comparison  
The product is available in the following configurations.  
HP LaserJet CM1312 mfp  
HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model)  
Prints at speeds up to 12 pages per minute (ppm)  
monochrome and 8 ppm color.  
HP LaserJet CM1312 mfp, plus:  
10/100 Base-T network port.  
PCL 6 printer drivers and HP postscript level 2 emulation.  
V.34 fax and 8-megabyte (MB) flash fax-storage memory.  
Two RJ-11 fax phone line ports  
Tray 1 holds up to 150 sheets of print media or up to 10  
envelopes.  
50-page automatic document feeder (ADF)  
160-MB random-access memory (RAM)  
Four memory card slots  
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port.  
128-MB random-access memory (RAM).  
Flatbed scanner.  
Color graphics display  
2
Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
 
Product features  
Performance  
Prints at speeds up to 12 pages per minute (ppm) monochrome and 8 ppm color.  
1,200 dots per inch (dpi) with Image REt 3600 text and graphics.  
Adjustable settings to optimize print quality.  
Print quality  
The HP UltraPrecise print cartridge has a finer toner formulation that provides sharper text  
and graphics.  
Fax (HP LaserJet CM1312  
(fax/photo-card model) only)  
Full-functionality fax capabilities with a V.34 fax; includes a phone book, fax/tel, and  
delayed-fax features.  
Copy  
Scan  
Includes ADF (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) only) that allows faster, more  
efficient copy jobs with multiple-page documents.  
The product provides 1,200 pixels per inch (ppi), 24-bit full-color scanning from letter/A4-  
size scanner glass.  
The product provides 300 ppi, 24-bit full-color scanning from the ADF (HP LaserJet  
CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) only).  
Includes an ADF (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) only) that allows faster,  
more efficient scan jobs with multiple-page documents.  
Memory card slots (HP  
LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-  
card model) only)  
Supports a variety of memory cards. See Photo on page 149 for more information.  
Networking  
TCP/IP  
IPv4  
IPv6  
Printer driver features  
Interface connections  
Fast printing performance, built-in Intellifont and TrueType scaling technologies, and  
advanced imaging capabilities are benefits of the PCL 6 printer language.  
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port.  
10/100 Base-T ethernet (RJ-45) network port (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card  
model) only).  
RJ-11 fax/phone cable ports (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) only).  
N-up printing (printing more than one page on a sheet).  
A supplies status page that displays the amount of life remaining in the print cartridge.  
No-shake cartridge design.  
Economical printing  
Supplies  
Authentication for HP print cartridges.  
Enabled supplies-ordering capability.  
Accessibility  
Online user guide that is compatible with text screen-readers.  
Print cartridges can be installed and removed by using one hand.  
All doors and covers can be opened by using one hand.  
ENWW  
Product features  
3
         
Product walkaround  
HP LaserJet CM1312 mfp front view  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tray 1  
Print-cartridge door latch  
Top (face-down) output bin  
Flatbed scanner  
Control panel  
Front door for jam access  
HP LaserJet CM1312 mfp back view  
7
Power connector  
4
Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
       
8
9
Rear door for jam access  
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port  
HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) front view  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Tray 1  
Print-cartridge door latch  
Top (face-down) output bin  
Control panel  
Automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray  
Automatic document feeder (ADF) output bin  
Memory card slots  
ENWW  
Product walkaround  
5
 
HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) Back view  
8
Power connector  
9
Rear door for jam access  
Fax ports  
10  
11  
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port and network port.  
Interface ports  
1
2
3
Fax ports (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) only)  
Network port (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) only)  
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port  
6
Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
   
2 Control panel  
ENWW  
7
 
Control-panel walkaround  
HP LaserJet CM1312 control panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
Liquid Crystal Display  
OK button and navigation arrows  
Cancel button: cancel the current selection  
Copy Features button: access the Copy menu.  
Copy Black button: perform a copy operation in black & white.  
Lighter/Darker button: change the lightness or darkness of the scanned image.  
Copy Color button: perform a copy operation in color.  
# Copies button: specify the number of copies.  
Back button: go back to the previous menu  
Setup button: access the Setup menu.  
8
Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
   
HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) control panel  
.
.
1
2
Speed dials. 4 speed dial buttons and one shift button to support up to 8 speed dials.  
Fax Menu button. Access the fax menu.  
Start Fax button. Initiate a fax from the control panel.  
3
4
Alphanumeric buttons. Use the alphanumeric buttons to type data into the product control-panel display and dial  
telephone numbers for faxing.  
OK button and navigation arrows. Use these buttons to select and confirm menu choices.  
Cancel button. Use this button to cancel the current menu selection.  
Setup button. Access the main Setup menu.  
Help button. Provides information about the message on the control-panel display.  
Back button. Go back to the previous menu.  
5
Copy Menu button. Access the Copy menu.  
Start Copy Black button. Perform a black and white copy operation.  
Start Copy Color button. Perform a color copy operation.  
Scan Menu button. Access the scan menu.  
6
7
Start Scan button. Perform a scan operation.  
Photo Menu button. Access the photo menu.  
Start Photo button. Print the selected photos from the memory card.  
ENWW  
Control-panel walkaround  
9
 
Control-panel menus  
Use the control-panel menus  
To gain access to the control-panel menus, use the following steps.  
1. Press Setup.  
NOTE: To access the function specific menus (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model)  
only) press Fax Menu Copy Menu Scan Menu or Photo Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to navigate the listings.  
Press OK to select the appropriate option.  
Press Cancel to cancel an action or return to the Ready state.  
Control-panel Setup menu  
These sub menus are available from the control-panel main Setup menu:  
Use the Copy setup menu to configure basic copy default settings such as contrast, collation, or  
the number of copies printed.  
Use the Reports menu to print reports that provide information about the product.  
Use the Fax setup menu to configure the outgoing and incoming fax options and the basic settings  
for all faxes.  
Use the Photo setup menu to configure the basic settings for printing photos from a memory card.  
Use the System setup menu to establish basic product settings such as language, print quality,  
or volume levels.  
Use the Service menu to restore default settings, clean the product, and activate special modes  
that affect print output.  
Use the Network configuration menu to configure network settings such as TCP/IP configuration.  
NOTE: To print a detailed list of the entire control-panel menu and its structure, print a menu map.  
Table 2-1 Copy setup menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Auto Select  
Mixed  
Description  
Default Optimize  
Sets the default copy quality.  
Printed Picture  
Photograph  
Text  
Default lighter/darker  
Default Collation  
Sets the default contrast option.  
Sets the default collation option.  
On  
Off  
10 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
         
Table 2-1 Copy setup menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Default number of  
copies  
(Range: 1-99)  
Sets the default number of copies.  
Default Reduce/Enlarge Original=100%  
Legal to Letter=78%  
Sets the default percentage to reduce or enlarge a copied  
document.  
Legal to A4=83%  
A4 to Letter=94%  
Letter to A4=97%  
Full Page=91%  
Fit to page  
2 pages per sheet  
4 pages per sheet  
Custom: 25 to 400%  
On  
Default Copy Draft  
Default Multi-page  
Advanced  
Sets the default draft mode option.  
Off  
On  
Sets the default multi-page flatbed copy option.  
Enables or disables the color copy button.  
Off  
Color Copy  
Lightness  
The default light/dark setting for copies. Possible values  
range from 1 to 11 with 6 being the default (no change) value.  
Contrast  
The default contrast setting for copies. Possible values  
range from 1 to 11 with 6 being the default (no change) value.  
Sharpen  
The default sharpen setting for copies. Possible values  
range from 1 to 11 with 6 being the default (no change) value.  
Background Removal  
The default background removal setting for copies. Possible  
values range from 1 to 11 with 6 being the default (no  
change) value.  
Color Balance  
The default color balance setting for copies. Possible values  
range from 1 to 11 with 6 being the default (no change) value.  
Values can be set for each of the following settings:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
Grayness  
The default grayness setting for copies. Possible values  
range from 1 to 11 with 6 being the default (no change) value.  
Restore defaults  
Sets all customized copy settings to the factory default  
values.  
ENWW  
Control-panel menus 11  
Table 2-2 Reports menu  
Menu Item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Demo page  
Prints a page that demonstrates print quality.  
Menu structure  
Prints a control-panel menu layout map. The active settings  
for each menu are listed.  
Configuration  
report  
Prints a list of all the product settings. Includes network  
information when the product is connected to the network.  
Supplies status  
page  
Prints the print-cartridge status. Includes the following  
information:  
Approximate pages remaining  
Serial number  
Number of pages printed  
Network report  
Displays status for:  
Network hardware configuration  
Enabled features  
TCP/IP and SNMP information  
Network statistics  
Usage page  
Displays the number of pages printed, faxed, copied, and  
scanned by the product.  
PCL font list  
Prints a list of all installed PCL 5 fonts.  
Prints a list of all installed PS fonts.  
Prints a list of all installed PCL 6 fonts.  
Prints out information about the color toner usage  
Prints the service page  
PS font list  
PCL6 font list  
Color usage log  
Service page  
Diagnostics page  
Prints out diagnostic information about calibration and color  
quality  
Table 2-3 Photo setup menu  
Menu Item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Default image  
Size  
(List of available  
photo image sizes)  
The default image size for photos  
Default lighter/  
darker  
The default light/dark setting for photos. Possible values  
range from 1 to 11 with 6 being the default (no change)  
value.  
Default number of  
copies  
The default number of copies setting for photos. Possible  
values range from 1 to 99.  
12 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
                       
Table 2-3 Photo setup menu (continued)  
Menu Item  
Sub-menu item  
Color  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Default output  
color  
Specify the default output for photos (color or black & white)  
Black & white  
Restore defaults  
Restore the factory default settings for photo setup  
Table 2-4 Fax setup menu (fax models only)  
Menu Item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Fax Set-up Utility  
Utility for configuring the fax settings. Follow the on-screen  
prompts and select the appropriate response for each  
question using the arrow keys.  
ENWW  
Control-panel menus 13  
 
Table 2-4 Fax setup menu (fax models only) (continued)  
Menu Item  
Sub-menu item  
Time/Date  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Basic setup  
(Settings for time  
format, current  
Sets the time and date setting for the product.  
time, date format,  
and current date.)  
Fax Header  
Your fax number  
Company name  
Automatic  
TAM  
Sets the identifying information that is sent to the receiving  
product.  
Answer mode  
Sets the type of answer mode. The following options are  
available:  
Automatic: The product automatically answers an  
incoming call on the configured number of rings.  
Fax/Tel  
Manual  
TAM: A telephone answering machine (TAM) is  
attached to the Aux phone port of the product. The  
product will not pick up any incoming call, but only listen  
for fax tones after the answering machine has picked  
up the call.  
Fax/Tel: The product must automatically pick up the  
call and determine if the call is a voice or fax call. If the  
call is a fax call, the product handles the call as usual.  
If the call is a voice call, an audible synthesized ring is  
generated to alert the user of an incoming voice call.  
Manual : The user must press the Start Fax button or  
use an extension phone to make the product answer  
the incoming call.  
Rings to answer  
Distinctive Ring  
(Range of 1-9)  
Sets the number of rings that must occur before the fax  
modem answers.  
All Rings  
Single  
Allows a user to have two or three phone numbers on a  
single line, each with a different ring pattern (on a phone  
system with distinctive-ring service).  
Double  
All Rings: The product answers any calls that come  
through the telephone line.  
Triple  
Single: The product answers any calls that produce a  
single-ring pattern.  
Double and Triple  
Double: The product answers any calls that produce a  
double-ring pattern.  
Triple: The product answers any calls that produce a  
triple-ring pattern.  
Double and Triple: The product answers any calls that  
produce a double-ring or triple-ring pattern.  
Dial Prefix  
On  
Off  
Specifies a prefix number that must be dialed when sending  
faxes from the product.  
14 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
   
Table 2-4 Fax setup menu (fax models only) (continued)  
Menu Item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Standard  
Fine  
Description  
Advanced setup  
Default Fax  
Resolution  
Sets the resolution for sent documents. Higher resolution  
images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show more  
detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and  
show less detail, but the file size is smaller.  
Superfine  
Photo  
Default lighter/  
darker  
Sets the darkness of outgoing faxes.  
Fit to page  
On  
Off  
Shrinks faxes that are larger than Letter-size or A4-size so  
that they can fit onto a Letter-size or A4-size page. If this  
feature is set to Off, faxes larger than Letter or A4 will print  
on multiple pages.  
Default glass size  
Dialing Mode  
Letter  
A4  
Sets the default paper size for documents being scanned  
from the flatbed scanner.  
Tone  
Pulse  
On  
Sets whether the product should use tone or pulse dialing.  
Redial if busy  
Sets whether or not the product should attempt to redial if  
the line is busy.  
Off  
Redial if no answer On  
Off  
Sets whether the product should attempt to dial if the  
recipient fax number does not answer.  
Redial Comm.  
Error  
On  
Off  
Sets whether the product should attempt to redial the  
recipient fax number if a communication error occurs.  
ENWW  
Control-panel menus 15  
   
Table 2-4 Fax setup menu (fax models only) (continued)  
Menu Item  
Sub-menu item  
Detect dial tone  
Sub-menu item  
On  
Description  
Advanced setup  
Sets whether the product should check for a dial tone before  
sending a fax.  
Off  
On  
Billing codes  
Extension Phone  
Stamp faxes  
Enables the use of billing codes when set to On. A prompt  
will appear that asks you to enter the billing code for an  
outgoing fax.  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
When this feature is enabled, the user can press the 1-2-3  
buttons on the extension phone to cause the product to  
answer an incoming fax call.  
Sets product to add the date, time, sender's phone number,  
and page number to each page of the faxes that this product  
receives.  
Private receive  
Setting Private receive to On requires the user to have set  
a password in product security. After the password is set,  
the following options are set:  
Private receive is turned on.  
All old faxes are deleted from memory.  
Fax forwarding set to Off and is not allowed to be  
changed.  
All incoming faxes are stored in memory.  
Fax Number  
Confirmation  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
Verify that a fax number is valid by entering it a second time.  
Allow Fax Reprint  
Sets whether all received faxes stored in available memory  
can be reprinted.  
Fax/Tel Ring Time 20  
Sets when the product should stop sounding the Fax/Tel  
audible ring to notify the user of an incoming voice call.  
30  
40  
70  
Fax Speed  
Fast(V.34)  
Increases or decreases the allowed fax communication  
speed.  
Medium(V.17)  
Slow(V.29)  
Table 2-5 System setup menu  
Menu Item  
Language  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
(List of available  
control-panel  
Sets the language in which the control panel displays  
messages and product reports.  
display languages.)  
16 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
 
Table 2-5 System setup menu (continued)  
Menu Item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Paper setup  
Default paper size Letter  
Sets the size for printing internal reports or any print job that  
does not specify a size.  
A4  
Legal  
Default paper type Lists available  
Sets the type for printing internal reports or any print job that  
does not specify a type.  
media types.  
Tray 1  
Paper type  
Paper size  
Wait forever  
Cancel  
Sets the default size and type for tray 1.  
Paper out action  
Determines how the product reacts when a print job requires  
a media size or type that is unavailable or when a specified  
tray is empty.  
Override  
Select Wait forever to make the product wait until the  
correct media is loaded.  
Select Override to print on a different size paper after  
a specified delay.  
Select Cancel to automatically cancel the print job after  
a specified delay.  
If either Override or Cancel is chosen, the control  
panel prompts for the number of seconds to delay. Use  
the arrow keys to either decrease the time or increase  
the time up to 3600 seconds.  
ENWW  
Control-panel menus 17  
Table 2-5 System setup menu (continued)  
Menu Item  
Sub-menu item  
Calibrate Color  
Sub-menu item  
Calibrate Now  
After Power On  
Description  
Print quality  
Perform a Color Pane Registration (CPR) and density  
calibration. Select Calibrate Now to perform an immediate  
calibration. Select After Power On to specify the minutes/  
hours the product should wait after power on to perform an  
automatic calibration (the default is 15 minutes).  
Cartridge low  
threshold  
(Range of 1-20)  
Sets the percentage at which the control panel generates a  
low-toner message.  
Replace supplies  
Stop at Out  
Sets how the product reacts when it detects that the print  
cartridge has reached its estimated end of life.  
Override out  
Choose Stop at Out to stop printing when the estimated end  
of life has been reached for a supply. Printing beyond this  
point is possible using Override out. The supply does not  
need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer  
acceptable.  
Choose Override out to allow the product to continue  
printing when supply items have reached the end of their  
estimated life. Using this option will eventually result in  
unacceptable print quality. Consider having a replacement  
cartridge available for when the print quality becomes  
unacceptable.  
Information about the remaining toner is not available when  
printing in Override out mode.  
Once an HP supply has reached the end of its estimated life,  
HP's Premium Protection Warranty on that supply has  
ended. For warranty information, see Print cartridge limited  
Color supply out  
Stop printing  
Sets how the product should react when it detects that a  
color cartridge has reached its estimated end of life. Select  
Stop printing to stop all printing until the cartridge is  
replaced, or select Continue black to continue printing in  
black monochrome mode.  
Continue black  
Adjust Alignment Print Test Page  
(photo card models  
only)  
Print out a tray-specific sheet of instructions and a test page  
with a border that can be used to estimate the adjustment  
needed to center the printed image on the page.  
Adjust Tray 1  
After printing the test page, use the options in the Adjust  
Tray 1 menu to calibrate the tray. The following settings can  
be adjusted for Tray 1:  
X1 Shift  
Y Shift  
Volume Settings  
(photo card models  
only)  
Alarm volume  
Soft  
Sets the volume levels for the product.  
Ring volume  
Medium  
Loud  
Off  
Key-press volume  
Phone line volume  
Time/Date  
(Settings for time  
format, current time,  
date format, and  
current date.)  
Sets the time and date setting for the product.  
18 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
 
Table 2-5 System setup menu (continued)  
Menu Item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Product security  
On  
Sets the product-security feature. When the setting is set to  
On, you must set a personal identification number (PIN).  
Off  
Courier font  
Regular  
Dark  
Sets Courier font values.  
Table 2-6 Service menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Fax Service  
Clear saved faxes  
Clear all faxes in memory.  
These include any received  
faxes (including non-printed,  
non-sent PC upload, and non-  
forwarded faxes), unsent faxes  
(including delayed faxes), and  
any printed faxes that are still in  
memory. Deleted faxes cannot  
be recovered. For each deleted  
item, the fax activity log is  
updated.  
Run Fax Test  
Perform a fax test to verify that  
the phone cord is plugged in  
the correct outlet and that there  
is a signal on the phone line. A  
fax test report is printed  
indicating the results.  
Print T.30 trace  
Now  
Prints or schedules a report  
that is used to troubleshoot fax  
transmission issues.  
Never  
If error  
At end of call  
Error correction  
Fax Service Log  
On  
Off  
The error correction mode  
allows the sending device to re-  
transmit data if it detects an  
error signal. The default setting  
is on.  
The fax service log prints out  
the last 40 entries in the fax log.  
Cleaning mode  
Cleans the product when  
specks or other marks appear  
on printed output. The cleaning  
process removes dust and  
excess toner from the paper  
path.  
When selected, the product  
prompts you to load plain Letter  
or A4 paper in tray 1. Press  
OK to begin the cleaning  
process. Wait until the process  
completes. Discard the page  
that prints.  
ENWW  
Control-panel menus 19  
 
Table 2-6 Service menu (continued)  
Menu item Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
PowerSave Time Off  
1 minute  
Specify the amount of idle time  
before the product enters sleep  
mode.  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
1 hour  
2 hours  
4 hours  
High  
USB speed  
Sets the USB speed.  
Full  
Less paper curl  
On  
When printed pages are  
consistently curled, this option  
sets the product to a mode that  
reduces curl.  
Off  
The default setting is Off.  
Archive print  
On  
Off  
When printing pages that will  
be stored for a long time, this  
option sets the product to a  
mode that reduces toner  
smearing and dusting.  
The default setting is Off.  
Restore defaults  
Sets all customized settings to  
the factory default values.  
Table 2-7 Network configuration menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Automatic  
Manual  
Description  
TCP/IP configuration  
Automatic automatically configures all the TCP/IP settings via  
DHCP, BootP or AutoIP.  
Manual requires you to manually configure the IP address, subnet  
mask, and default gateway.  
The control panel prompts you to specify values for each address  
section. Use the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the value.  
Press OK to accept the value and move the cursor to the next field.  
As each address is completed, the product prompts for address  
confirmation before moving to the next one. After all three  
addresses are set, the product automatically restarts.  
Memory Card (memory  
card products only)  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
Enables or disables the use of the memory card slots.  
Auto crossover  
Enable or disable the use of a standard 10/100 network cable when  
the product is directly connected to a PC.  
20 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
 
Table 2-7 Network configuration menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Network services  
IPv4  
Sets whether the product will use either IPv4, IPv6, or DHCPv6  
protocol.  
IPv6  
DHCPv6  
Yes  
Show IP address  
Link speed  
Sets whether the product displays the IP address on the control  
panel.  
No  
Automatic (Default)  
10T Full  
10T Half  
100TX Full  
100TX Half  
Sets the link speed manually if needed.  
After setting the link speed, the product automatically restarts.  
Restore defaults  
Resets all network configurations to their factory defaults.  
Function specific menus (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) only)  
The product features function-specific menus for faxing, copying, scanning, and managing photos on a  
memory card. To access these menus, press the Fax Menu Copy Menu Scan Menu or Photo Menu  
buttons respectively.  
These are the features supported by the function specific menus.  
Use the Fax menu to perform basic fax functions such as sending a fax or editing the phone book,  
reprinting faxes that were previously printed, or printing faxes that are stored in memory.  
Use the Copy menu to access basic copy functions and customize the copy output.  
Use the Scan menu to scan to a memory card.  
Use the Photo menu to display a list of photo options for a valid inserted memory card.  
ENWW  
Control-panel menus 21  
 
Table 2-8 Fax Menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Send a fax  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Send  
Send a fax. On screen  
prompts guide the process.  
Redial  
Redial the last fax number  
and resend.  
Send fax later  
Fax Job status  
Allows a fax to be sent at a  
later time and date.  
Displays pending fax jobs,  
and allows you to cancel  
pending fax jobs.  
Fax Resolution  
Standard  
Fine  
Temporarily change the  
resolution of outgoing faxes.  
The resolution resets to  
default after 2 minutes of idle  
fax scan time.  
Superfine  
Photo  
Receive  
Print faxes  
Prints stored faxes when the  
private-receive feature is on.  
This menu item appears only  
when the private-receive  
feature is turned on.  
Block junk faxes  
Add number  
Modifies the junk fax list. The  
junk fax list can contain up to  
30 numbers. When the  
product receives a call from  
one of the junk fax numbers, it  
deletes the incoming fax. It  
also logs the junk fax in the  
activity log along with job-  
accounting information.  
Delete number  
Delete All Entries  
Junk Fax list  
Reprint faxes  
Forward fax  
Prints the received faxes  
stored in available memory.  
On  
Off  
Sets product to send all  
received faxes to another fax  
machine.  
Polling receive  
Allows the product to call  
another fax machine that has  
polling send enabled.  
22 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
 
Table 2-8 Fax Menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Phone Book  
Select an entry  
Select an individual or group  
dial entry for faxing.  
Individual Setup  
Group setup  
Edits the fax phone book  
speed dials and group-dial  
entries. The product supports  
up to 120 phone book entries,  
which can be either individual  
or group entries.  
Delete entry  
Delete a specific phone book  
entry.  
Delete All Entries  
Phone Book report  
Delete all entries in the phone  
book  
Print a list of all the individual  
and group dial entries in the  
phone book.  
ENWW  
Control-panel menus 23  
Table 2-8 Fax Menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Never  
Description  
Fax Reports  
Fax Confirmation  
Sets whether or not the  
product prints a confirmation  
report after a successful  
sending or receiving job.  
Every fax  
Send fax only  
Receive fax  
On  
Include first page  
Fax Error Report  
Sets whether or not the  
product includes a thumbnail  
image of the first page of the  
fax on the report.  
Off  
Every error  
Send Error  
Receive Error  
Never  
Sets whether or not the  
product prints a report after a  
failed sending or receiving  
job.  
Last Call Report  
Fax Activity log  
Prints a detailed report of the  
last fax operation, either sent  
or received.  
Print log now  
Auto Log Print  
Print log now: Prints a list of  
the faxes that have been sent  
from or received by this  
product.  
Auto Log Print: Select On to  
automatically print a report  
after every fax job. Select Off  
to turn off the automatic print  
feature.  
Phone Book report  
Junk Fax list  
Prints a list of the speed dials  
that have been set up for this  
product.  
Prints a list of phone numbers  
that are blocked from sending  
faxes to this product.  
Billing report  
Prints a list of billing codes  
that have been used for  
outgoing faxes. This report  
shows how many sent faxes  
were billed to each code. This  
menu item appears only when  
the billing codes feature is  
turned on.  
All fax reports  
Sub-menu item  
Prints all fax-related reports.  
Table 2-9 Photo Menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
View  
View photos on the memory  
card. Use the arrow buttons to  
navigate through the photos.  
24 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
   
Table 2-9 Photo Menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Easy Print  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Individual photo  
All photos (#-#)  
A range of photos  
Custom  
Print photos quickly from the  
memory card by selecting the  
numbers of the photos you  
want to print.  
Thumbnail  
Options  
Fast  
Print thumbnails of photos  
from the memory card (30 per  
page).  
Best  
Proof Sheet  
Print proof sheet  
Scan proof sheet  
Print a proof sheet or scan a  
proof sheet. The proof sheet  
is a page of thumbnails (20  
per page) generated from a  
valid memory card. A marked  
proof sheet can then be  
scanned and the selected  
images are printed at full size.  
Current Settings  
Select image size  
Select paper size  
Select paper type  
Number of copies  
Output Color  
Adjust the default photo  
settings for image size, paper  
size, paper type, number of  
copies, and output color (color  
or black & white).  
Rotate Photo  
Slideshow  
Rotate a photo stored on a  
memory card.  
View a slideshow of the  
photos on a memory card.  
Table 2-10 Copy Menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Copies  
Size  
(1–99)  
Specify the number of copies  
Specify the size of the copy.  
Original=100%  
Legal to Letter=78%  
Legal to A4=83%  
A4 to Letter=94%  
Letter to A4=97%  
Full Page=91%  
Fit to page  
2 pages per sheet  
4 pages per sheet  
Custom: 25 to 400%  
ENWW  
Control-panel menus 25  
 
Table 2-10 Copy Menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Light/Dark  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Description  
Specify the contrast of the  
copy.  
Options  
Optimize  
Select settings to optimize the  
copy print quality.  
Copy Paper  
Specify the paper type for the  
copies.  
Multi-Page Copy  
Copy Collation  
Copy Draft  
Copy multiple pages.  
Specify the copy collation  
Specify the print quality for  
copies.  
Image Adjustment  
Lightness  
Contrast  
Adjust the settings for image  
quality in a copy.  
Sharpen  
Background  
Color Balance  
Grayness  
26 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Supported operating systems for Windows  
The product supports the following Windows operating systems:  
Full software installation  
Print and scan driver  
Windows XP (32-bit)  
Windows XP (64 bit)  
Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)  
Windows 2000  
Windows 2003 Server (32-bit and 64-bit)  
NOTE: The PCL 5 UPD and HP postscript level 3 emulation drivers are only available on the HP  
support website: www.hp.com/support/CM1312series.  
Supported printer drivers for Windows  
PCL 5 UPD  
PCL 6  
HP postscript level 3 emulation  
The printer drivers include online Help that has instructions for common printing tasks and also describes  
the buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver.  
NOTE: The version of PCL 5 that is used in this product is identical to the version of PCL 5 that is used  
in the HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) for Windows. It installs and operates in the same manner as  
previous versions of PCL 5, and it does not require any special configuration.  
For more information about the UPD, see www.hp.com/go/upd.  
HP Universal Print Driver (UPD)  
The HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) for Windows is a single driver that gives you instant access to  
virtually any HP LaserJet product, from any location, without downloading separate drivers. It is built on  
proven HP print driver technology and has been tested thoroughly and used with many software  
programs. It is a powerful solution that performs consistently over time.  
The HP UPD communicates directly with each HP product, gathers configuration information, and then  
customizes the user interface to show the product’s unique, available features. It automatically enables  
features that are available for the product, such as two-sided printing and stapling, so you do not need  
to enable them manually.  
For more information, go to www.hp.com/go/upd.  
28 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
         
UPD installation modes  
Traditional mode  
Use this mode if you are installing the driver from a CD for a single computer.  
When installed with this mode, UPD operates like traditional printer drivers.  
If you use this mode, you must install UPD separately for each computer.  
Dynamic mode  
Use this mode if you are installing the driver for a mobile computer, so you can  
discover and print to HP products in any location.  
Use this mode if you are installing UPD for a workgroup.  
To use this mode, download UPD from the Internet. See www.hp.com/go/  
upd.  
ENWW  
HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) 29  
 
Select the correct printer driver for Windows  
Printer drivers allow you to gain access to the device features and allow the computer to communicate  
with the device (using a printer language). Check the installation notes and readme files on the device  
CD for additional software and languages.  
Use the PCL 6 printer driver for the best overall performance.  
Use the PCL 5 printer driver for general office printing.  
Use the HP PS Universal driver for printing from postscript level 2 emulation needs, or for postscript  
flash font support.  
30 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
 
Priority for print settings  
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:  
NOTE: The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.  
Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program  
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here override settings changed  
anywhere else.  
Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program  
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower  
priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.  
Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver): Click Properties in the Print dialog box to open  
the printer driver. Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box do not override settings  
anywhere else in the printing software.  
Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in  
all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog  
boxes.  
Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority  
than changes made anywhere else.  
Change printer-driver settings for Windows  
To change the settings for all print  
jobs until the software program is  
closed  
To change the default settings for all To change the device configuration  
print jobs settings  
1. On the File menu in the software  
program, click Print.  
1. Click Start, click Settings, and then 1. Click Start, click Settings, and then  
click Printers (Windows 2000) or  
Printers and Faxes (Windows XP  
Professional and Server 2003) or  
Printers and Other Hardware  
Devices (Windows XP Home).  
click Printers (Windows 2000) or  
Printers and Faxes (Windows XP  
Professional and Server 2003) or  
Printers and Other Hardware  
Devices (Windows XP Home).  
2. Select the driver, and then click  
Properties or Preferences.  
The steps can vary; this procedure is  
most common.  
For Windows Vista, click Start, click  
Control Panel, and then click  
Printer.  
For Windows Vista, click Start, click  
Control Panel, and then click  
Printer.  
2. Right-click the driver icon, and then 2. Right-click the driver icon, and then  
select Printing Preferences.  
select Properties.  
3. Click the Device Settings tab.  
ENWW  
Priority for print settings 31  
     
Software installation types for Windows  
The following software installation types are available:  
Recommended. Installs the full software solution.  
Express. Installs the print and scan drivers only. There is an express option for USB-connected  
products and another express option for network-connected products.  
Remove software for Windows  
1. Click Start, and then click All Programs.  
2. Click HP, and then click HP Color LaserJet CM1312 MFP Series mfp.  
3. Click Uninstall HP Color LaserJet CM1312 MFP Series mfp, and then follow the onscreen  
instructions to remove the software.  
32 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
   
Supported utilities for Windows  
HP ToolboxFX  
The HP ToolboxFX is a program that you can use for the following tasks:  
Checking the device status  
Checking the supplies status  
Setting up alerts  
Viewing device documentation  
Gaining access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools  
HP ToolboxFX is installed during the Recommended software installation from the product CD-ROM.  
For more information, see View the HP ToolboxFX on page 160.  
Embedded Web server  
The device is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about  
device and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet  
Explorer, Netscape Navigator, Apple Safari, or Firefox.  
The embedded Web server resides on the device. It is not loaded on a network server.  
The embedded Web server provides an interface to the device that anyone who has a network-  
connected computer and a standard Web browser can use. No special software is installed or  
configured, but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer. To gain access to the  
embedded Web server, type the IP address for the device in the address line of the browser. (To find  
the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page,  
For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see  
HP Web Jetadmin (web only)  
HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool for network-connected printers within an  
intranet, and it should be installed only on the network administrator’s computer.  
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems,  
When installed on a host server, a Windows client can gain access to HP Web Jetadmin by using a  
supported Web browser (such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer 4.x or Netscape Navigator 4.x or later)  
by navigating to the HP Web Jetadmin host.  
Other Windows components and utilities  
Software installer — automates the printing system installation  
Online Web registration  
HP Customer Participation Program  
ENWW  
Supported utilities for Windows 33  
                 
HP Update  
Photosmart Essential  
HP Solution Center  
HP LaserJet Scan program and driver  
Software for other operating systems  
OS  
Software  
UNIX  
For HP-UX and Solaris networks, go to www.hp.com/support/net_printing to download the  
HP Jetdirect printer installer for UNIX.  
Linux  
For information, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.  
34 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
       
4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
35  
 
Software for Macintosh  
Supported operating systems for Macintosh  
The device supports the following Macintosh operating systems:  
Mac OS X v10.3, v10.4 and later  
NOTE: For Mac OS v10.4 and later, PPC and Intel Core Processor Macs are supported.  
Supported printer drivers for Macintosh  
The HP installer provides PostScript® Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs),  
and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers.  
The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to device features.  
Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the computer.  
Priority for print settings for Macintosh  
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:  
NOTE: The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.  
Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program  
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here override settings changed  
anywhere else.  
Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program  
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower  
priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.  
Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver): Click Properties in the Print dialog box to open  
the printer driver. Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box do not override settings  
anywhere else in the printing software.  
Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in  
all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog  
boxes.  
Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority  
than changes made anywhere else.  
Change printer-driver settings for Macintosh  
To change the settings for all print  
jobs until the software program is  
closed  
To change the default settings for all To change the device configuration  
print jobs  
settings  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
1. In the Finder, on the Go menu, click  
Applications.  
2. Change the settings that you want 2. Change the settings that you want  
on the various pop-up menus.  
on the various pop-up menus.  
2. Open Utilities, and then open  
Printer Setup Utility.  
3. On the Presets pop-up menu, click  
Save as and type a name for the  
preset.  
3. Click on the print queue.  
36 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
               
To change the settings for all print  
jobs until the software program is  
closed  
To change the default settings for all To change the device configuration  
print jobs  
settings  
These settings are saved in the  
4. On the Printers menu, click Show  
Info.  
Presets menu. To use the new settings,  
you must select the saved preset option  
every time you open a program and print.  
5. Click the Installable Options  
menu.  
NOTE: Configuration settings might  
not be available in Classic mode.  
Software installation types for Macintosh  
Install Macintosh software for direct connections (USB)  
1. Insert the device CD into the CD-ROM drive and run the installer. If the CD menu does not run  
automatically, double-click the CD icon on the desktop.  
2. Connect a USB cable between the device USB port and the computer USB port. Use a standard  
2-meter (6.56-foot) USB cable.  
3. Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.  
4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
USB printer queues are created automatically when the device is attached to the computer.  
However, the queue will use a generic PPD if the installer has not been run before the USB cable  
is connected. Complete the following steps to change the queue PPD.  
Install Macintosh software for networks  
1. Connect the network cable between the device and a network port.  
2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. If the CD does not run automatically, double-click the CD  
icon on the desktop.  
3. Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.  
4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Remove software from Macintosh operating systems  
1. To remove the software from a Macintosh computer, drag the PPD files to the trash can.  
2. Run the uninstaller from the HP product folder.  
Supported utilities for Macintosh  
Embedded Web server  
The device is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about  
device and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Netscape Navigator,  
Apple Safari, or Firefox.  
ENWW  
Software for Macintosh 37  
             
The embedded Web server resides on the device. It is available on network and direct-connected  
devices.  
The embedded Web server provides an interface to the device that anyone who has a network-  
connected computer and a standard Web browser can use. No special software is installed or  
configured, but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer. To gain access to the  
embedded Web server, click Maintain Device in HP Director.  
For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see  
38 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver  
Print  
Create and use printing presets in Macintosh  
Use printing presets to save the current printer driver settings for reuse.  
Create a printing preset  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Select the print settings.  
4. In the Presets box, click Save As..., and type a name for the preset.  
5. Click OK.  
Use printing presets  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. In the Presets box, select the printing preset that you want to use.  
NOTE: To use printer-driver default settings, select Factory Default.  
Resize documents or print on a custom paper size  
You can scale a document to fit on a different size of paper.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Open the Paper Handling menu.  
3. In the area for Destination Paper Size, select Scale to fit paper size, and then select the size  
from the drop-down list.  
4. If you want to use only paper that is smaller than the document, select Scale down only.  
Print a cover page  
You can print a separate cover page for your document that includes a message (such as “Confidential”).  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Open the Cover Page pop-up menu, and then select whether to print the cover page Before  
Document or After Document.  
4. In the Cover Page Type pop-up menu, select the message that you want to print on the cover  
page.  
NOTE: To print a blank cover page, select Standard as the Cover Page Type.  
ENWW  
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 39  
         
Use watermarks  
A watermark is a notice, such as “Confidential,” that is printed in the background of each page of a  
document.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Open the Watermarks menu.  
3. Next to Mode, select the type of watermark to use. Select Watermark to print a semi-transparent  
message. Select Overlay to print a message that is not transparent.  
4. Next to Pages, select whether to print the watermark on all pages or on the first page only.  
5. Next to Text, select one of the standard messages, or select Custom and type a new message in  
the box.  
6. Select options for the remaining settings.  
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper in Macintosh  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way  
to print draft pages.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Open the Layout pop-up menu.  
4. Next to Pages per Sheet, select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet (1, 2,  
4, 6, 9, or 16).  
5. Next to Layout Direction, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.  
6. Next to Borders, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.  
40 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
   
Print on both sides of the page (duplex printing)  
Use automatic duplex printing  
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special  
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:  
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first.  
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper face-down with the top edge at the back of the  
tray.  
2. On the File menu, click Print.  
3. Open the Layout pop-up menu.  
4. Next to Two-Sided, select either Long-Edge Binding or Short-Edge Binding.  
5. Click Print.  
Print on both sides manually  
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special  
paper such as letterhead, load the letterhead paper face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the  
printer first.  
CAUTION: To avoid jams, do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28-lb bond).  
2. On the File menu, click Print.  
3. On the Finishing pop-up menu, select Manual Duplex.  
4. Click OK.  
5. Click Print. Follow the instructions in the pop-up window that appears on the computer screen  
before replacing the output stack into the tray for printing the second half.  
6. If prompted, press the appropriate control-panel button to continue.  
Use the Services menu  
If the device is connected to a network, use the Services menu to obtain device and supply-status  
information.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Open the Services menu.  
3. Select a maintenance task from the drop-down list, and then click Launch. The embedded Web  
server opens to the page that provides the information for the task that you selected.  
4. To go to various support Web sites for this device, select an Internet Services option from the drop-  
down list, and then click Go!.  
Scan  
For more information about tasks and settings described in this section, see the HP Director online Help.  
ENWW  
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 41  
         
Scanning tasks  
To scan to a software program, scan an item using the program itself. Any TWAIN-compliant program  
can scan an image. If the program is not TWAIN-compliant, save the scanned image to a file then place,  
open, or import the file in the software program.  
Use page-by-page scanning  
1. Lift the flatbed scanner lid and load the original that is to be scanned face-down on the flatbed  
scanner with the upper-left corner of the document at the lower-right corner of the glass. Gently  
close the lid.  
2. Double-click the HP Director desktop alias.  
3. Click the HP Director, and then click Scan to open the HP dialog box.  
4. Click Scan.  
5. To scan multiple pages, load the next page and click Scan. Repeat until all pages are scanned.  
6. Click Finish, and then click Destinations.  
Scan from ADF  
1. Load the pages face up in the ADF with the top edge first.  
2. In HP Director click Scan to open the HP dialog box.  
3. Click Scan first or Scan all.  
4. Click Finish and then select the scan destinations.  
Scan to file  
1. In Destinations, choose Save To File(s).  
2. Name the file and specify the destination location.  
3. Click Save. The original is scanned and saved.  
Scan to e-mail  
1. In Destinations, choose E-mail.  
2. A blank e-mail opens with the scanned document as an attachment.  
3. Enter an e-mail recipient, add text, or other attachments, then click Send.  
Fax (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) only)  
1. In the software program, on the File menu, select Print.  
2. Click PDF, and then select Fax PDF.  
3. Enter a fax number in the To field.  
4. To include a fax cover page, select Use Cover Page, and then enter the cover page subject and  
message (optional).  
5. Click Fax.  
42 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
         
Photo  
In HP Director, click the Photo icon to launch the Photosmart Studio software. Use the software to import  
photos from a memory card, edit photos, and print photos from the PC.  
ENWW  
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 43  
 
44 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
5 Connectivity  
NOTE: Configuring TCP/IP settings is complicated and should be performed only by experienced  
network administrators. BOOTP will require a server to configure specific TCP/IP settings for the  
product. DHCP will also require a server, but the TCP/IP settings will not be fixed for the product. Finally,  
the manual method to configure specific TCP/IP settings can be done from the control panel, the  
embedded Web server, HP ToolboxFX, or HP Web Jetadmin. For additional help or network  
configuration, contact your network provider.  
ENWW  
45  
   
Supported network operating systems  
The following operating systems support network printing:  
Full software installation  
Print and scan driver  
Printer driver only  
Windows XP (32-bit)  
Windows XP (64-bit)  
Windows 2000  
Linux (Web only)  
Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)  
Mac OS X v10.3, v10.4, and later  
UNIX model scripts (Web only)  
Windows 2003 Server (32-bit and  
64-bit)  
USB connection  
NOTE: Do not connect the USB cable before installing the software. The installation program will notify  
you when the USB cable should be connected.  
This product supports a USB 2.0 connection. You must use an A-to-B type USB cable for printing.  
1. Insert the product CD into your computer. If the software installer does not start, navigate to the  
setup.exe file on the CD and double-click the file.  
2. Follow the installer instructions.  
3. Allow the installation process to complete, and then restart the computer.  
46 Chapter 5 Connectivity  
ENWW  
   
Printer sharing disclaimer  
HP does not support peer-to-peer networking, as the feature is a function of Microsoft operating systems  
and not of the HP printer drivers. Go to Microsoft at www.microsoft.com.  
Supported network protocols (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/  
photo-card model) only)  
The product supports the TCP/IP network protocol. It is the most widely used and accepted networking  
protocol. Many networking services utilize this protocol. This product also supports IPv4 and IPv6. The  
following tables list the networking services/protocols that are supported on the product.  
Table 5-1 Printing  
Service name  
Description  
port9100 (Direct Mode)  
Printing service  
Printing service  
Line printer daemon (LPD)  
Table 5-2 Network product discovery  
Service name  
Description  
SLP (Service Location Protocol)  
Device Discovery Protocol, used to help find and configure  
network devices. Used primarily by Microsoft-based software  
programs.  
mDNS (multicast Domain Name Service - also known as  
“Rendezvous” or “Bonjour”)  
Device Discovery Protocol, used to help find and configure  
network devices. Used primarily by Apple Macintosh-based  
software programs.  
ws-discover  
LLMNR  
Used by Microsoft-based software programs  
Used when DNS services are not available  
Table 5-3 Messaging and management  
Service name  
Description  
HTTP (hypertext transfer protocol)  
Allows Web browsers to communicate with embedded Web  
server.  
EWS (embedded Web server)  
Allows a user to manage the product through a Web browser.  
SNMP (simple network management protocol)  
Used by network programs for product management. SNMP  
V1 and standard MIB-II (Management Information Base)  
objects are supported.  
Table 5-4 IP addressing  
Service name  
Description  
DHCP (dynamic host configuration protocol), IPv4, and IPv6  
For Automatic IP address assignment. DHCP server provides  
the product with an IP address. Generally requires no user  
intervention for product to obtain IP address from a DHCP  
server.  
ENWW  
Printer sharing disclaimer 47  
         
Table 5-4 IP addressing (continued)  
Service name  
Description  
BOOTP (bootstrap protocol)  
For Automatic IP address assignment. BOOTP server  
provides the product with an IP address. Requires  
administrator to input the product MAC hardware address on  
BOOTP server in order for product to obtain an IP address from  
that server.  
Auto IP  
For Automatic IP address assignment. If neither a DHCP  
server nor a BOOTP server is present, this service allows the  
product to generate a unique IP address.  
Install the product on a network (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/  
photo-card model) only)  
In this configuration, the product is connected directly to the network and can be configured to allow all  
computers on the network to print directly to the product.  
NOTE: This mode is the recommended network configuration for the product.  
1. Before turning on the product, connect the product directly to the network by inserting a network  
cable into the product network port.  
2. Turn on the product, wait 2 minutes, and then use the control panel to print a configuration page. .  
NOTE: Make sure that an IP address is listed on the configuration page before proceeding to the  
next step. If an IP address is not present, reprint the configuration page.  
3. Insert the product CD into the computer. If the software installer does not start, navigate to the  
setup.exe file on the CD and double-click the file.  
4. Follow the installer instructions.  
NOTE: When the installer prompts for a network address, provide the IP address listed on the  
configuration page that you printed before starting the installer program, or search for the product  
on the network.  
5. Allow the installation process to complete, and then restart the computer.  
48 Chapter 5 Connectivity  
ENWW  
   
Configure the network product (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/  
photo-card model) only)  
View settings  
Network configuration page  
The network configuration page lists the current settings and properties of the product network card. To  
print the network configuration page from the product, complete the following steps.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Network report, and then press OK.  
Configuration page  
The configuration page lists the current settings and properties of the product. You can print a  
configuration page from the product or HP ToolboxFX. To print the configuration page from the product,  
complete the following steps.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Configuration report, and then press OK.  
A second page also prints (fax models only). On that page, the Fax Settings and Imaging Settings  
sections provide details about the product fax settings.  
Change settings  
You can use the embedded Web server (EWS) or HP ToolboxFX to view or change the IP configuration  
settings. To gain access to the embedded Web server, type the product IP address in the address line  
of a Web browser.  
You can view HP ToolboxFX when the product is directly connected to a computer or when it is  
connected to the network. You must perform a complete software installation to use HP ToolboxFX.  
Open HP ToolboxFX in one of these ways:  
In the Windows system tray, double-click the HP ToolboxFX icon.  
On the Windows Start menu, click Programs (or All Programs in Windows XP), click HP, click  
the product name, and then click HP ToolboxFX.  
In HP ToolboxFX, click the Network Settings tab.  
From the Networking tab (EWS) or the Network Settings tab (HP ToolboxFX), you can change the  
following configurations:  
Host Name  
Manual IP Address  
ENWW  
Configure the network product (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) only) 49  
         
Manual Subnet Mask  
Manual Default Gateway  
NOTE: Changing the network configuration might require you to change the browser URL before you  
can communicate with the product again. The product will be unavailable for a few seconds while the  
network resets.  
Set password  
product passwordl.  
IP address  
The product IP address can be set manually, or it can be configured automatically via DHCP, BootP, or  
AutoIP.  
Manual configuration  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Network configuration, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select TCP/IP configuration, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Manual, and then press OK.  
5. Use the alphanumeric buttons to type the IP address, and then press OK.  
6. If the IP address is incorrect, use the arrow buttons to select No, and then press OK. Repeat step  
5 with the correct IP address, and then repeat step 5 for the subnet mask and default gateway  
settings.  
Automatic configuration  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Network configuration, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select TCP/IP configuration, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Automatic, and then press OK.  
It may take several minutes before the automatic IP address is ready for use.  
NOTE: If you want to disable or enable specific automatic IP modes (such as BOOTP, DHCP, or  
AutoIP), these settings can be changed by using the embedded Web server or HP ToolboxFX only.  
Display the IP address on the control panel  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Network configuration, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Show IP address, and then press OK.  
50 Chapter 5 Connectivity  
ENWW  
       
NOTE: You can also view the IP address in the EWS or HP ToolboxFX by selecting the Advanced  
Network Settings tab.  
IPv4 and IPv6 settings  
Only the IPv4 protocol can be configured manually. The IPv4 protocol can be set from HP ToolboxFX  
or from the product control panel. The IPv6 protocol can be selected only from the product control panel.  
Link speed setting  
NOTE: Incorrect changes to the link speed setting might prevent the product from communicating with  
other network devices. For most situations, the product should be left in automatic mode. Changes can  
cause the product to power cycle. Changes should be made only while the product is idle.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Network configuration, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Link speed, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select one of the following settings.  
Automatic  
10T Full  
10T Half  
100TX Full  
100TX Half  
NOTE: The setting must match with the network product to which you are connecting (a network  
hub, switch, gateway, router, or computer).  
5. Press OK. The product will power cycle.  
ENWW  
Configure the network product (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) only) 51  
   
52 Chapter 5 Connectivity  
ENWW  
Understand paper and print media use  
This product supports a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in this  
user guide. Paper or print media that does not meet these guidelines might cause the following problems:  
Poor print quality  
Increased jams  
Premature wear on the product, requiring repair  
For best results, use only HP-brand paper and print media designed for laser printers or multiuse. Do  
not use paper or print media made for inkjet printers. Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend  
the use of other brands of media because HP cannot control their quality.  
It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this user guide and still not produce satisfactory  
results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and/or humidity levels,  
or other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.  
CAUTION: Using paper or print media that does not meet Hewlett-Packard's specifications might  
cause problems for the product, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard  
warranty or service agreements.  
54 Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
 
Supported paper and print media sizes  
This product supports a number of paper sizes, and it adapts to various media.  
NOTE: To obtain best print results, select the appropriate paper size and type in the print driver before  
printing.  
Table 6-1 Supported paper and print media sizes  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray 1  
Letter  
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)  
Legal  
A4  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)  
184 x 267 mm (7.24 x 10.51 inches)  
Executive  
A3  
A5  
297 x 420 mm (11.69 x 16.54 inches)  
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches)  
A6  
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches)  
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches)  
197 x 273 mm (7.75 x 10.75 inches)  
195 x 270 mm (7.7 x 10.6 inches)  
184 x 260 mm (7.25 x 10.25 inches)  
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)  
107 x 152 mm (4 x 6 inches)  
B5 (JIS)  
16k  
16k  
16k  
8.5 x 13  
4 x 61  
5 x 81  
10 x 15 cm1  
Custom  
127 x 203 mm (5 x 8 inches)  
100 x 150 mm (3.9 x 5.9 inches)  
Minimum—76 x127 mm (3 x 5 inches); Maximum—216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 inches)  
1
These sizes are supported as custom sizes.  
Table 6-2 Supported envelopes and postcards  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray 1  
Envelope #10  
105 x 241 mm (4.13 x 9.49 inches)  
Envelope DL  
Envelope C5  
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)  
162 x 229 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)  
ENWW  
Supported paper and print media sizes 55  
   
Table 6-2 Supported envelopes and postcards (continued)  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray 1  
Envelope B5  
176 x 250 mm (6.7 x 9.8 inches)  
Envelope Monarch  
Postcard  
98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 inches)  
100 x 148 mm (3.94 x 5.83 inches)  
148 x 200 mm (5.83 x 7.87 inches)  
Double postcard  
Supported paper types and tray capacity  
Media type  
Weight  
Capacity1  
Paper orientation  
< 96 g/m2  
Every day:  
Up to 150 sheets  
Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
the tray  
Plain  
Light  
Bond  
Recycled  
96-130 g/m2  
131-175 g/m2  
176-220 g/m2  
Presentation:  
Up to 15 mm (0.6 inches) stack  
height  
Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
the tray  
Matte paper, mid-weight to  
heavy  
Glossy paper, mid-weight to  
heavy  
Brochure:  
Up to 15 mm (0.6 inches) stack  
height  
Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
the tray  
Matte paper, mid-weight to  
heavy  
Glossy paper, mid-weight to  
heavy  
Photo/cover  
Up to 15 mm (0.6 inches) stack  
height  
Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
the tray  
Matte cover paper  
Glossy cover paper  
Matte photo paper  
Glossy photo paper  
Cardstock  
Other:  
Up to 50 sheets, or 10 envelopes Side to be printed on face-up,  
with the top edge at the back of  
Color laser transparency  
the tray or the stamp-end at the  
back of the tray  
Labels  
Letterhead, envelope  
Heavy envelope  
56 Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
 
Media type  
Weight  
Capacity1  
Paper orientation  
Preprinted  
Prepunched  
Colored  
Rough  
Tough  
1
Capacity can vary depending on media weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.  
Special paper or print media guidelines  
This product supports printing on special media. Use the following guidelines to obtain satisfactory  
results. When using special paper or print media, be sure to set the type and size in your print driver to  
obtain the best print results.  
CAUTION: HP LaserJet printers use fusers to bond dry toner particles to the paper in very precise  
dots. HP laser paper is designed to withstand this extreme heat. Using inkjet paper not designed for this  
technology could damage your printer.  
Media type  
Do  
Do not  
Envelopes  
Store envelopes flat.  
Do not use envelopes that are  
wrinkled, nicked, stuck together, or  
otherwise damaged.  
Use envelopes where the seam  
extends all the way to the corner of  
the envelope.  
Do not use envelopes that have  
clasps, snaps, windows, or coated  
linings.  
Use peel-off adhesive strips that  
are approved for use in laser  
printers.  
Do not use self-stick adhesives or  
other synthetic materials.  
Labels  
Use only labels that have no  
exposed backing between them.  
Do not use labels that have wrinkles  
or bubbles, or are damaged.  
Use Labels that lie flat.  
Do not print partial sheets of labels.  
Use only full sheets of labels.  
Transparencies  
Use only transparencies that are  
approved for use in laser printers.  
Do not use transparent print media  
not approved for laser printers.  
Place transparencies on a flat  
surface after removing them from  
the product.  
Letterhead or preprinted forms  
Heavy paper  
Use only letterhead or forms  
approved for use in laser printers.  
Do not use raised or metallic  
letterhead.  
Use only heavy paper that is  
approved for use in laser printers  
and meets the weight specifications  
for this product.  
Do not use paper that is heavier  
than the recommended media  
specification for this product unless  
it is HP paper that has been  
approved for use in this product.  
Glossy or coated paper  
Use only glossy or coated paper  
that is approved for use in laser  
printers.  
Do not use glossy or coated paper  
designed for use in inkjet products.  
ENWW  
Special paper or print media guidelines 57  
   
Load paper and print media  
Tray 1  
Tray 1 holds up to 150 pages of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper, or fewer pages of heavier media (15 mm (0.6 in)).  
Load media with the top forward and the side to be printed on facing down.  
Media guides ensure that the media feeds correctly into the product and that the print is not skewed.  
Tray 1 has side and rear media guides. When loading media, adjust the media guides to match the  
length and width of the media that you are using.  
NOTE: When you add new media, make sure that you remove all of the media from the input tray and  
straighten the stack of new media. Do not fan the media. This reduces jams by preventing multiple  
sheets of media from feeding through the product at one time.  
58 Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
     
Configure tray  
When using tray 1 for a specific size of paper, you can set the default size for the tray in HP ToolboxFX  
or from the control panel. In HP ToolboxFX, select Paper handling, and then select the size for the tray.  
To set the default paper size or type from the control panel, complete the following steps.  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select System setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow keys to select Paper setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow keys to select the tray to be configured, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow keys to select either Paper type or Paper size, and then press OK.  
6. Use the arrow keys to select a default type or size for the tray, and then press OK.  
ENWW  
Configure tray 59  
 
60 Chapter 6 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
7 Use product features  
ENWW  
61  
 
Economy settings  
Archive print  
Archive print produces output that is less susceptible to toner smearing and dusting. Use archive print  
to create documents that you want to preserve or archive.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Service, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Archive print, select On or Off, and then press OK.  
62 Chapter 7 Use product features  
ENWW  
   
Fonts  
Select fonts  
Use HP ToolboxFX to change product fonts by clicking the Print Settings tab, and then clicking the  
PCL5 page. Click Apply to save the changes.  
Print lists of available fonts  
Print lists of the fonts available from the product control panel. See Information pages on page 158.  
ENWW  
Fonts 63  
       
64 Chapter 7 Use product features  
ENWW  
8 Print tasks  
This section provides information about common printing tasks.  
NOTE: Many of the functions that are described in this chapter also can be performed by using  
HP ToolboxFX. For instructions, see the HP ToolboxFX online Help.  
ENWW  
65  
 
Cancel a print job  
If the print job is currently printing, cancel it by pressing Cancel on the product control panel.  
NOTE: Pressing Cancel clears the job that the product is currently processing. If more than one  
process is running (for example, the product is printing a document while receiving a fax), pressing  
Cancel clears the process that currently appears on the product control panel.  
You can also cancel a print job from a software program or a print queue.  
To stop the print job immediately, remove the remaining print media from the product. After printing  
stops, use one of the following options:  
Device control panel: To cancel the print job, press and release Cancel on the product control  
panel.  
Software program: Typically, a dialog box appears briefly on the computer screen, allowing you  
to cancel the print job.  
Windows print queue: If a print job is waiting in a print queue (computer memory) or print spooler,  
delete the job there.  
Windows 2000: Go to the Printer dialog box. Click Start, click Settings, and then click  
Printers. Double-click the product icon to open the window, select the print job, and then click  
Delete.  
Windows XP: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes. Double-click  
the product icon to open the window, right-click the print job that you want to cancel, and then  
click Cancel.  
Windows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then, under Hardware and Sound,  
click Printer. Double-click the product icon to open the window, right-click the print job that  
you want to cancel, and then click Cancel.  
Macintosh print queue: Open the print queue by double-clicking the product icon in the dock.  
Highlight the print job, and then click Delete.  
66 Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
 
Use features in the Windows printer driver  
Open the printer driver  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Open the printer driver  
On the File menu in the software program, click Print. Select  
the printer, and then click Properties or Preferences.  
Get help for any printing option  
Click the ? symbol in the upper-right corner of the printer driver,  
and then click any item in the printer driver. A pop-up message  
displays that provides information about the item. Or, click  
Help to open the online Help.  
Use printing shortcuts  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Printing Shortcuts tab.  
NOTE: In previous HP printer drivers, this feature was called Quick Sets.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Use a printing shortcut  
Select one of the shortcuts, and then click OK to print the job  
with the predefined settings.  
Create a custom printing shortcut  
a) Select an existing shortcut as a base. b) Select the print  
options for the new shortcut. c) Click Save As, type a name for  
the shortcut, and click OK.  
Set paper and quality options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Paper/Quality tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Select a page size  
Select a size from the Paper size drop-down list.  
Select a custom page size  
a) Click Custom. The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens.  
b) Type a name for the custom size, specify the dimensions,  
and click OK.  
Select a paper source  
Select a tray from the Paper source drop-down list.  
Select a type from the Paper type drop-down list.  
Select a paper type  
Print covers on different paper  
Print the first or last page on different paper  
a) In the Special pages area, click Covers or Print pages on  
different paper, and then click Settings. b) Select an option  
to print a blank or preprinted front cover, back cover, or both.  
Or, select an option to print the first or last page on different  
paper. c) Select options from the Paper source and Paper  
type drop-down lists, and then click Add. d) Click OK.  
Set document effects  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Effects tab.  
ENWW  
Use features in the Windows printer driver 67  
             
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Scale a page to fit on a selected paper size  
Click Print document on, and then select a size from the drop-  
down list.  
Scale a page to be a percent of the actual size  
Print a watermark  
Click % of actual size, and then type the percent or adjust the  
slider bar.  
a) Select a watermark from the Watermarks drop-down list.  
b) To print the watermark on the first page only, click First page  
only. Otherwise, the watermark is printed on each page.  
Add or edit watermarks  
a) In the Watermarks area, click Edit. The Watermark  
Details dialog box opens. b) Specify the settings for the  
watermark, and then click OK.  
NOTE: The printer driver must be stored on your computer  
for this to work.  
Set document finishing options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Finishing tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Print on both sides (Duplex)  
Click Print on both sides. If you will bind the document along  
the top edge, click Flip pages up.  
Print a booklet  
a) Click Print on both sides. b) In the Booklet layout drop-  
down list, click Left binding or Right binding. The Pages per  
sheet option automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet.  
Print multiple pages per sheet  
Select page orientation  
a) Select the number of pages per sheet from the Pages per  
sheet drop-down list. b) Select the correct options for Print  
page borders, Page order, and Orientation.  
a) In the Orientation area, click Portrait or Landscape. b) To  
print the page image upside down, click Rotate by 180  
degrees.  
Obtain support and product-status information  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Services tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Obtain support information for the product and order supplies In the Internet Services drop-down list, select a support  
online option, and click Go!  
Check the status of the product, including the level of supplies Click the Device and Supplies Status icon. The Device  
Status page of the HP embedded Web server opens.  
Set advanced printing options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Advanced tab.  
68 Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
     
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Select advanced printing options  
In any of the sections, click a current setting to activate a drop-  
down list so you can change the setting.  
Change the number of copies that are printed  
Open the Paper/Output section, and then enter the number of  
copies to print. If you select 2 or more copies, you can select  
the option to collate the pages.  
NOTE: If the software program that you are using does not  
provide a way to print a particular number of copies, you can  
change the number of copies in the driver.  
Changing this setting affects the number of copies for all print  
jobs. After your job has printed, restore this setting to the  
original value.  
Print colored text as black rather than as shades of gray  
a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the  
Printer Features section. b) In the Print All Text as Black  
drop-down list, select Enabled.  
Load letterhead or preprinted paper the same way for every  
job, whether printing on one or both sides of the page  
a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the  
Printer Features section. b) In the Alternative Letterhead  
Mode drop-down list, select On. c) At the product, load the  
paper the same way you would for printing on both sides.  
Change the order in which pages are printed  
a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the  
Layout Options section. b) In the Page Order drop-down list,  
select Front to Back to print the pages in the same order as  
they are in the document, or select Back to Front to print the  
pages in the reverse order.  
Change print-quality settings  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. On the Paper/Quality tab, select the resolution or print-quality settings that you want from the Print  
Quality drop-down menu.  
3. Click OK.  
Print edge-to-edge originals  
The printed or copied page has a border of approximately 4 mm (1/6 of an inch). The HP Color LaserJet  
CM1312 MFP Series does not support edge-to-edge printing or copying.  
ENWW  
Change print-quality settings 69  
   
70 Chapter 8 Print tasks  
ENWW  
Load originals  
Automatic document feeder (ADF models only)  
NOTE: The ADF capacity is up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 or 20 lb media.  
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the product, do not use an original that contains correction tape,  
correction fluid, paper clips, or staples. Also, do not load photographs, small originals, or fragile originals  
into the ADF. Use the flatbed glass to scan these items.  
1. Insert the top-end of the stack of originals into the ADF input tray, with the media stack face-up  
and the first page to be copied on top of the stack.  
If the media is longer than letter- or A4-sized paper, pull out the ADF input tray extension to support  
the media.  
2. Slide the stack into the ADF until it does not move any farther.  
Document loaded appears on the control-panel display.  
72 Chapter 9 Copy  
ENWW  
     
3. Adjust the media guides until they are snug against the media without restricting movement.  
Flatbed scanner  
NOTE: The maximum media size for flatbed scanning is letter. Use the ADF for scanning media larger  
than letter.  
1. Make sure that the automatic document feeder (ADF) contains no media.  
2. Lift the flatbed scanner cover.  
3. Place the original document face-down on the flatbed scanner with the upper-left corner of the  
document at the corner indicated by the icon on the scanner.  
4. Gently close the lid.  
ENWW  
Load originals 73  
 
Use copy  
One-touch copy  
1. Load the document into the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray or onto the flatbed  
scanner.  
2. Press Start Copy Black or Start Copy Color on the product control panel to start copying.  
3. Repeat the process for each copy.  
Multiple copies  
You can choose to have the default number of copies be any number from 1 to 99.  
Change the number of copies for the current job  
1. On the product control panel, press Number of copies (HP LaserJet CM1312 mfp), or the Copy  
Menu button (HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model)), then use the arrow buttons to select  
the number of copies (between 1 and 99) that you want to make for your current job.  
-or-  
For products with a graphical display, enter the number of copies using the alphanumeric keys.  
2. Press Start Copy Black or Start Copy Color to begin copying your job.  
NOTE: The change in the setting remains active for about 2 minutes after the copy job has been  
completed. During this time, Custom settings appears on the product control-panel display.  
Change the default number of copies  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Copy setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Default number of copies, and then press OK.  
4. Use the alphanumeric or arrow buttons to select the number of copies (between 1 and 99) that you  
want as the default.  
5. Press OK to save your selection.  
NOTE: The factory-set default for the number of copies is 1.  
Cancel a copy job  
To cancel a copy job, press Cancel on the product control panel. If more than one process is running,  
pressing Cancel clears the process that currently appears on the product control-panel display.  
NOTE: If you cancel a copy job, clear the document from the flatbed scanner or from the automatic  
document feeder.  
74 Chapter 9 Copy  
ENWW  
             
Reduce or enlarge copies  
Reduce or enlarge copies for the current job  
1. On the product control panel, press Copy Features.  
-or-  
On products with a graphic display, press Copy Menu.  
2. On the product control panel, press Reduce/Enlarge.  
-or-  
On products with a graphic display, press Size.  
3. Select the size to which you would like to reduce or enlarge the copies in this job.  
NOTE: If you select Custom: 25 to 400%, type a percentage by using the alphanumeric buttons.  
If you select 2 pages per sheet or 4 pages per sheet, select the orientation (portrait or landscape).  
4. Press Start Copy to save the selection and immediately start the copy job, or press OK to save the  
selection without starting the job.  
NOTE: The change in the setting remains active for about 2 minutes after the copy job has been  
completed. During this time, Custom settings appears on the product control-panel display.  
You must change the default media size in the media input tray to match the output size, or part of your  
copy might be cut off.  
Adjust the default copy size  
NOTE: The default copy size is the size to which copies are normally reduced or enlarged. If you keep  
the factory default size setting of Original=100%, all copies will be the same size as the original  
document.  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Copy setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Default Reduce/Enlarge, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select the option for how you normally want to reduce or enlarge copies.  
NOTE: If you select Custom: 25 to 400%, type in the percentage of the original size that you  
normally want for copies.  
If you select 2 pages per sheet or 4 pages per sheet, select the orientation (portrait or landscape).  
5. Press OK to save the selection.  
The product can reduce copies to as little as 25% of the original size or enlarge copies to as much as  
400% of the original size.  
Reduction/enlargement settings  
Original=100%  
Legal to Letter=78%  
ENWW  
Use copy 75  
 
Legal to A4=83%  
A4 to Letter=94%  
Letter to A4=97%  
Full Page=91%  
Fit to page  
2 pages per sheet  
4 pages per sheet  
Custom: 25 to 400%  
NOTE: When using the Fit to page setting, copy from the flatbed scanner only.  
When using the 2 pages per sheet or 4 pages per sheet setting, copy from the automatic document  
feeder only. Also, after selecting the 2 pages per sheet or 4 pages per sheet option, you must select  
the page orientation (portrait or landscape).  
Change the copy-collation setting  
You can set the product to automatically collate multiple copies into sets. For example, if you are making  
two copies of three pages and the automatic collation is on, the pages print in this order: 1,2,3,1,2,3. If  
automatic collation is off, the pages print in this order: 1,1,2,2,3,3.  
To use the automatic collation, the original document size must fit into the memory. If it does not, the  
product makes only one copy and a message appears notifying you of the change. If that happens, use  
one of the following methods to finish the job:  
Split the job into smaller jobs that contain fewer pages.  
Make only one copy of the document at a time.  
Turn off the automatic collation.  
Change the copy-collation setting for the current job  
1. On the product control panel, press Copy Features.  
-or-  
On products with a graphical display, press Copy Menu, then use the arrow keys to select  
Options and press OK.  
2. Use the arrow keys to select Copy Collation, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off.  
4. Press Start Copy to save the selection and immediately start the copy job, or press OK to save the  
selection without starting the job.  
Change the default copy-collation setting  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Copy setup, and then press OK.  
76 Chapter 9 Copy  
ENWW  
   
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Default Collation, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off.  
5. Press OK to save the selection.  
NOTE: The factory-set default for automatic copy collation is On.  
Color copies or black and white copies (Mono)  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup, and then press OK.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Copy setup, and then press OK  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced, and then press OK  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Color Copy, and then press OK  
5. Use the arrow buttons and select On or Off. When set to Off, the control panel displays Restrict  
color if Start Copy Color is pressed.  
6. Press OK.  
Copy settings  
Copy quality  
Five copy-quality settings are available: Auto Select, Mixed, Printed Picture, Photograph, and  
Text.  
The factory-set default for copy quality is Auto Select, where product automatically chooses the best  
quality setting based on the media input.  
When making a copy of a photo or graphic, you can select the Photograph setting for photos or the  
Printed Picture setting for other graphics to increase the quality of your copy. Select the Text setting  
for items that contain mostly text. Select the Mixed setting for documents that include both text and  
graphics.  
Adjust the copy quality for the current job  
1. On the product control panel, press Copy Features.  
-or-  
On products with a graphical display, press Copy Menu, then use the arrow keys to select  
Options, and then press OK.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Optimize, and then press OK to see the quality setting for the copy.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the quality setting options.  
4. Select a setting, and then press Start Copy to save the selection and immediately start the copy  
job, or press OK to save the selection without starting the job.  
NOTE: The change in the setting remains active for about 2 minutes after the copy job has been  
completed. During this time, Custom settings appears on the product control-panel display.  
ENWW  
Copy settings 77  
       
Adjust the default copy quality  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Copy setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Default Optimize, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select the copy quality, and then press OK to save the selection.  
Clean the scanner glass  
Dirt, fingerprints, smudges, hair and other marks on the scanner glass slows scanner performance and  
affects the accuracy of special features such as fit-to-page and copy. To improve the quality of your  
copies and scans, clean the scanner glass. See Clean the scanner glass on page 184.  
Adjust the lighter/darker (contrast) setting  
The lighter/darker setting affects the lightness or darkness (contrast) of the copy. Use the following  
procedure to change the contrast for the current copy job only.  
Adjust the lighter/darker setting for the current job  
1. On the control panel press Lighter/Darker.  
-or-  
On products with a graphical display, press Copy Menu, then use the arrow buttons to select  
Lighter/Darker, and then press OK.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to adjust the setting. Move the slider to the left to make the copy lighter than  
the original, or move the slider to the right to make the copy darker than the original.  
3. Press Start Copy to save the selection and immediately start the copy job, or press OK to save the  
selection without starting the job.  
NOTE: The change in the setting remains active for about 2 minutes after the copy job has been  
completed. During this time, Custom settings appears on the product control-panel display.  
Adjust the default lighter/darker setting  
NOTE: The default lighter/darker setting affects all copy jobs.  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Copy setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Default lighter/darker, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to adjust the setting. Move the slider to the left to make all of the copies  
lighter than the original, or move the slider to the right to make all of the copies darker than the  
original.  
5. Press OK to save the selection.  
78 Chapter 9 Copy  
ENWW  
     
Define custom copy settings  
When you change the copy settings at the control panel, Custom settings appears on the control-panel  
display. The custom settings remain in effect for approximately 2 minutes, and then the product returns  
to the default settings. To immediately return to the default settings, press Cancel.  
Print or copy edge-to-edge  
The product cannot print fully edge-to-edge. The maximum printing area is 203.2 x 347 mm (8 x 13.7 in),  
leaving a 4 mm unprintable border around the page.  
Considerations for printing or scanning documents with cropped edges:  
When the original is smaller than the output size, move the original 4 mm (1/6 inch) away from the  
corner indicated by the icon on the scanner. Recopy or scan in this position.  
When the original is the size of the desired output, make a copy with smaller edges by using  
Reduce/Enlarge to reduce the image.  
The edges and the copy are reduced in size by up to 2 mm.  
Copy onto media of different types and sizes  
The product is set to copy on either letter- or A4-size paper, depending on the country/region in which  
it was purchased. You can change the size and type of media that you copy to for the current copy job  
or for all copy jobs.  
Change the media size and type for the current job  
NOTE: Change the default media size and type settings to change the media size and type.  
1. On the product control panel, press Copy Features.  
-or-  
For products with a graphical display, press Copy Menu, then use the arrow keys to select  
Options, and then press OK.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Copy Paper, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select a media size, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select a media type, and then press OK.  
5. Press Start Copy.  
Change the default media-size setting  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select System setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Paper setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Default paper size, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select a media size, and then press OK.  
6. Press OK to save the selection.  
ENWW  
Copy settings 79  
         
Change the default media-type setting  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select System setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Paper setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Default paper type, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select a media type, and then press OK.  
6. Press OK to save the selection.  
Restore the copy-settings defaults  
Use the control panel to restore the copy settings to the factory-set default values.  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Copy setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Restore defaults, and then press OK.  
Copy a book (photo card models only)  
1. Lift the lid and place the book on the flatbed scanner with the page that you want to copy at the  
lower-right corner of the glass.  
80 Chapter 9 Copy  
ENWW  
         
2. Gently close the lid.  
3. Gently press down on the lid to press the book to the flatbed scanner surface.  
CAUTION: Pressing on the flatbed cover with too much force can break the lid hinges.  
4. Press Start Copy Black or Start Copy Color.  
Copy photos  
ENWW  
Copy photos 81  
   
NOTE: Photographs should be copied from the product flatbed scanner, not from the automatic  
document feeder (ADF).  
1. Place the photo on the flatbed scanner, picture-side down at the corner indicated by the icon on  
the scanner.  
2. Gently close the lid.  
3. Adjust the copy quality settings on the product as desired for photo printing.  
4. Press Start Copy.  
82 Chapter 9 Copy  
ENWW  
Copy mixed-size originals  
Use the flatbed scanner when making copies of mixed-size originals. Do not use the ADF.  
Duplex (two-sided) copy jobs  
Copy two-sided documents manually  
Set the multiple-page flatbed copy setting  
The multiple-page flatbed copy setting must be set to On before the product will produce two-sided  
copies from the flatbed scanner.  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Copy setup, and then press OK.  
3. Press OK to select Default Multi-page.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off.  
5. Press OK to save the selection.  
NOTE: The factory-set default for automatic copy collation is On.  
The Collate LED on the control panel is on when collation is on.  
Copy two-sided documents manually  
1. Load the first page of the document on the flatbed scanner.  
2. Press 2-Sided, and then use the arrow buttons to select the correct setting.  
3. Press OK, and then press Start Copy.  
4. Remove the first page, and then load the second page onto the flatbed scanner.  
5. Press OK, and then repeat the process until all of the pages in the original have been copied.  
6. When the copy job is completed, press Start Copy to return the product to Ready mode.  
ENWW  
Copy mixed-size originals 83  
         
84 Chapter 9 Copy  
ENWW  
10 Color for Windows  
ENWW  
85  
 
Manage color  
Manage color by changing the settings on the Color tab in the printer driver.  
Automatic  
Setting color options to Automatic typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents.  
The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral-gray color treatment, halftones, and edge  
enhancements for each element in a document. For more information, see your printer driver online  
Help.  
NOTE: Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing all color documents.  
Print in Grayscale  
Select the Print in Grayscale option from the printer driver to print a color document in black and white.  
This option is useful for printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed.  
When Print in Grayscale is selected, the product uses the monochrome mode, which reduces use of  
the color cartridges.  
Manual color adjustment  
Use the Manual color adjustment option to adjust the neutral-gray color treatment, halftones, and edge  
enhancements for text, graphics, and photographs. To gain access to the manual color options, from  
the Color tab, select Manual, and then select Settings.  
Manual color options  
Use manual color options to adjust the Neutral Grays, Halftone, and Edge Control options for text,  
graphics, and photographs.  
Table 10-1 Manual color options  
Setting description  
Halftone  
Setting options  
Smooth provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas  
and enhances photographs by smoothing color gradations. Select  
this option when uniform and smooth area fills are the top priority.  
Halftone options affect the color output resolution  
and clarity.  
Detail is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions  
among lines or colors, or images that contain a pattern or a high  
level of detail. Select this option when sharp edges and details are  
the top priority.  
86 Chapter 10 Color for Windows  
ENWW  
             
Table 10-1 Manual color options (continued)  
Setting description  
Setting options  
Neutral Grays  
Black Only generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using  
only black toner. This guarantees neutral colors without a color  
cast. This setting is best for documents and grayscale viewgraphs.  
The Neutral Grays setting determines the method for  
creating gray colors used in text, graphics, and  
photographs.  
4-Color generates neutral colors (grays and black) by combining  
all four toner colors. This method produces smoother gradients  
and transitions to other colors, and it produces the darkest black.  
Edge Control  
Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive  
halftoning is on.  
The Edge Control setting determines how edges are  
rendered. Edge control has two components:  
adaptive halftoning and trapping. Adaptive halftoning  
increases edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the  
effect of color-plane misregistration by overlapping  
the edges of adjacent objects slightly.  
Normal sets trapping at a medium level. Adaptive halftoning is on.  
Light sets trapping at a minimal level, Adaptive halftoning is on.  
Off turns off both trapping and adaptive halftoning.  
Color themes  
Use color themes to adjust the RGB Color options for the entire page.  
Setting description  
RGB Color  
Setting options  
Default (sRGB) instructs the product to interpret RGB color as  
sRGB. The sRGB standard is the accepted standard of Microsoft  
and the World Wide Web Consortium (http://www.w3.org).  
Vivid instructs the product to increase the color saturation in the  
midtones. Less colorful objects are rendered more colorfully. This  
setting is recommended for printing business graphics.  
Photo interprets RGB color as if it were printed as a photograph  
using a digital mini-lab. It renders deeper, more saturated colors  
differently than Default (sRGB) mode. Use this setting for printing  
photos.  
Photo (AdobeRGB 1998) is for digital photos that use the  
AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB. When printing from a  
professional software program that uses AdobeRGB, it is  
important to turn off the color management in the software program  
and allow the product to manage the color space.  
None sets the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To  
render photographs correctly when this option is selected, you  
must manage color in the program in which you are working or in  
the operating system.  
ENWW  
Manage color 87  
       
Match colors  
For most users, the best method for matching colors is to print sRGB colors.  
The process of matching printer output color to your computer screen is complex, because printers and  
computer monitors use different methods of producing color. Monitors display colors by using light pixels  
that use an RGB (red, green, blue) color process, but printers print colors by using a CMYK (cyan,  
magenta, yellow, and black) process.  
Several factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on your monitor:  
Print media  
Printer colorants (inks or toners, for example)  
Printing process (inkjet, press, or laser technology, for example)  
Overhead lighting  
Personal differences in perception of color  
Software programs  
Printer drivers  
Computer operating systems  
Monitors  
Video cards and drivers  
Operating environment (humidity, for example)  
Keep these factors in mind when colors on your screen do not perfectly match your printed colors.  
Match colors using the Microsoft Office Basic Colors palette  
You can use HP ToolboxFX to print a palette of the Microsoft Office Basic Colors. Use this palette to  
select the colors that you want to use in printed documents. It shows the actual colors that print when  
you select these basic colors in a Microsoft Office program.  
1. In HP ToolboxFX, select the Help folder.  
2. In the Color Printing Tools section, select Print Basic Colors.  
3. Adjust color in your document to match the color selection on the printed color palette.  
Match colors using the HP Basic Color Match tool  
The HP Basic Color Match tool allows you to adjust spot color in your printed output. For example, you  
can match the color of your company logo on your printed output. You can save and use the new color  
schemes for specific documents or all printed documents, or you can create multiple color schemes that  
you can choose from later.  
This software tool is available to all users of this product. Before you can use the tool, you must download  
it from the Web through HP ToolboxFX or the software CD that came with your product.  
88 Chapter 10 Color for Windows  
ENWW  
         
Use the following procedure to download the HP Basic Color Match tool through the software CD.  
1. Insert the CD into your CD-ROM drive. The CD autoruns.  
2. Select Install more software.  
3. Select HP Basic Color Match. The tool downloads and installs itself. A desktop icon is also  
created.  
Use the following procedure to download the HP Basic Color Match tool through HP ToolboxFX.  
1. Open HP ToolboxFX.  
2. Select the Help folder.  
3. In the Color Printing Tools section, select Basic Color Match. The tool downloads and installs  
itself. A desktop icon is also created.  
After the HP Basic Color Match tool is downloaded and installed, it can be run from the desktop icon or  
from HP ToolboxFX (click the Help folder, and then Color Printing Tools, and then Basic Color  
Match). The tool guides you through selecting colors. All color matches selected are saved as a color  
theme and can be accessed in the future.  
Match colors using View Custom Colors  
You can use HP ToolboxFX to print a palette of custom colors. In the Toolbox Color Printing Tools  
section, click View Custom Colors. Tab to the color page desired and print the current page. In your  
document, type the red, green, and blue values in the software's custom color menu to change them to  
match the color on the palette.  
ENWW  
Match colors 89  
 
Advanced color use  
The product provides automatic color features that generate excellent color results. Carefully designed  
and tested color tables provide smooth, accurate color rendition of all printable colors.  
The product also provides sophisticated tools for the experienced professional.  
HP ColorSphere toner  
HP designs the print system (printer, print cartridges, toner, and paper) to work together to optimize print  
quality, product reliability, and user productivity. Original HP print cartridges contain HP ColorSphere  
toner that is specifically matched to your printer so that it will produce a wide range of brilliant colors.  
This helps you create professional looking documents that contain sharp, clear text and graphics and  
realistic printed photos.  
HP ColorSphere toner produces print-quality consistency and intensity you can depend on across a  
wide range of papers That means you can produce documents that help you make the right impression.  
Plus, HP professional-quality everyday and specialty papers (including a wide variety of HP media types  
and weights) are designed for the way you work.  
HP ImageREt 3600  
ImageREt 3600 provides 3600 dots-per-inch (dpi) color laser-class quality through a multi-level printing  
process. This process precisely controls color by combining up to four colors within a single dot and by  
varying the amount of toner in a given area. ImageREt 3600 has been improved for this product. The  
improvements offer trapping technologies, greater control over dot placement, and more precise control  
of toner quality in a dot. These new technologies, coupled with HP's multi-level printing process, result  
in a 600 x 600 dpi printer that provides 3600-dpi color laser-class quality with millions of smooth colors.  
Media selection  
For the best color and image quality, select the appropriate media type from the software printer menu  
or from the printer driver.  
Color options  
Color options automatically provide optimal color output. These options use object tagging, which  
provides optimal color and halftone settings for different objects (text, graphics, and photos) on a page.  
The printer driver determines which objects appear on a page and uses halftone and color settings that  
provide the best print quality for each object.  
In the Windows environment, the Automatic and Manual color options are on the Color tab in the printer  
driver.  
Standard red-green-blue (sRGB)  
Standard red-green-blue (sRGB) is a worldwide color standard that HP and Microsoft developed as a  
common color language for monitors, input devices (scanners and digital cameras), and output devices  
(printers and plotters). It is the default color space used for HP products, Microsoft operating systems,  
the World Wide Web, and most office software. The sRGB standard represents the typical Windows  
monitor and is the convergence standard for high-definition television.  
NOTE: Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room lighting can affect the appearance  
of colors on your screen. For more information, see Match colors on page 88.  
90 Chapter 10 Color for Windows  
ENWW  
               
The latest versions of Adobe PhotoShop®, CorelDRAW®, Microsoft Office, and many other programs  
use sRGB to communicate color. Because it is the default color space in Microsoft operating systems,  
sRGB has been adopted broadly. When programs and devices use sRGB to exchange color information,  
typical users experience greatly improved color matching.  
The sRGB standard improves your ability to match colors between the product, the computer monitor,  
and other input devices automatically, and eliminates the need to become a color expert.  
ENWW  
Advanced color use 91  
92 Chapter 10 Color for Windows  
ENWW  
Load originals for scanning  
Automatic document feeder (ADF) (fax/photo-card model)  
NOTE: The ADF capacity is up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 or 20 lb media.  
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the product, do not use an original that contains correction tape,  
correction fluid, paper clips, or staples. Also, do not load photographs, small originals, or fragile originals  
into the ADF. Use the flatbed glass to scan these items.  
1. Insert the top-end of the stack of originals into the ADF input tray, with the media stack face-up  
and the first page to be copied on top of the stack.  
If the media is longer than letter- or A4-sized paper, pull out the ADF input tray extension to support  
the media.  
2. Slide the stack with printed side up into the ADF until it does not move any farther.  
Document loaded appears on the control-panel display.  
94 Chapter 11 Scan  
ENWW  
   
3. Adjust the media guides until they are snug against the media without restricting movement.  
Flatbed scanner  
NOTE: The maximum media size for flatbed scanning is letter/A4. For media larger than letter, use  
the ADF.  
1. Make sure that the automatic document feeder (ADF) contains no media.  
2. Lift the flatbed scanner cover.  
3. Place the original document face-down on the flatbed scanner with the upper-left corner of the  
document at the corner indicated by the icon on the scanner.  
4. Gently close the lid.  
Use scan  
Scan methods  
Scan jobs can be performed in the following ways.  
Scan from the computer by using HP LaserJet Scan (Windows)  
Scanning by using HP Director (Macintosh). See Scan on page 41.  
ENWW  
Use scan 95  
       
Scan from the product (fax/photo-card model)  
Scan from TWAIN-compliant or Windows Imaging Application (WIA)-compliant software  
NOTE: To learn about and use text-recognition software, install the Readiris program from the  
software CD-ROM. Text-recognition software is also known as optical character recognition (OCR)  
software.  
Scan from the PC  
1. In the HP program group, select Scan to start HP LaserJet Scan.  
NOTE: Pressing Start Scan on the product control panel also starts HP LaserJet Scan.  
2. Choose the action that you want to accomplish.  
Select a destination to begin scanning immediately.  
Select Scan after prompting me for settings to specify additional settings before you begin  
scanning.  
Select Set up the device to program the Scan Menu button.  
3. Click OK.  
NOTE: OK should indicate the action that you want to accomplish.  
Scan from the product (fax/photo-card model)  
NOTE: In order to use the Scan Menu button, you must have performed the recommended installation,  
and the button must have destinations set. See Set up the product Scan Menu button on page 96.  
In order to use the Start Scan button, the product must be connected to a computer via USB.  
Scan directly from the product by using the control-panel scan buttons. Press Start Scan or Scan To to  
scan to a folder (Windows only) or to scan to e-mail.  
Use the Scan To feature (fax/photo-card model)  
Scanning from the product control panel is only supported with a full software installation.  
HP ToolboxFX must be running to scan by using the Scan Menu button or the Start Scan button.  
For the best scan quality, place your originals onto the flatbed scanner, rather than loading them  
into the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray.  
The computer that is connected to the product must be turned on.  
Set up the product Scan Menu button  
Destinations must be set up prior to using the Scan Menu button on the control panel. Use HP LaserJet  
Scan to program the folder, e-mail, and program destinations for scanning.  
Set up destinations on the product  
1. Click Start, click Programs (or All Programs in Windows XP), click HP, click the product, click  
Scan, and then click Settings.  
2. Select Change the destinations that show up on the all-in-one control panel.  
96 Chapter 11 Scan  
ENWW  
         
3. The product is pre-configured with the following three destinations in the dialog box.  
Scan a document and attach it to an e-mail  
Scan a photo and attach it to an e-mail  
Scan a photo and save it as a file  
4. Highlight a destination and click the arrow to move to the destinations currently on the dialog box.  
Repeat for all three destinations.  
5. Click Update.  
Add destinations  
1. Click Start, click Programs (or All Programs in Windows XP), click HP, click the product, click  
Scan, and then click Settings.  
2. Select Create a new destination with settings that I specify.  
3. Do one of the following:  
For folders, select Save it to my computer, and then click Next.  
For e-mail, select Attach to a new e-mail, and then click Next.  
For programs, select Open it in another software application, and then click Next.  
4. Enter the file destination name or check to set up the destination on the product. Name the default  
destination, and then click Next.  
5. Select the quality and click Next.  
6. Verify the selections, and then click Save.  
Delete destinations  
1. From the Set up the <Scan To> list for the All-in-One, select one of the Available Destinations  
on this PC and click Delete. The Delete Destination dialog box displays.  
2. From the Delete Destination dialog box, highlight the destination to delete and click Next. The  
Confirmation dialog box displays.  
3. Click Delete to perform the deletion, or click Cancel to choose another destination.  
Scan to a file, e-mail, or software program  
NOTE: To use this feature in Windows, a destination must be programmed in the scan setup before  
scanning to a destination. See Set up the product Scan Menu button on page 96.  
1. Load the originals that are to be scanned face-up in the automatic document feeder (ADF) input  
tray, with the top of the document forward, and adjust the media guides.  
-or-  
Lift the flatbed scanner lid and load the original that is to be scanned face-down on the flatbed  
scanner with the corner located as indicated by the icon on the scanner. Gently close the lid.  
2. On the product control panel, press Scan Menu.  
ENWW  
Use scan 97  
   
3. Use the arrow buttons to select a file destination.  
4. Press Start Scan or OK to scan the document to a file.  
NOTE: Scanning to e-mail is supported by any e-mail program that supports the Messaging  
Application Programming Interface (MAPI) protocol. Many versions of popular e-mail programs seem  
to be MAPI-compliant. See the support information for your e-mail program to determine whether or not  
it is MAPI-compliant.  
Scan to a memory card  
This feature allows you to scan a document and save it to an inserted memory card.  
Scan Details  
You can scan from both the ADF and flatbed. The device will look for the presence of paper in the ADF.  
If there is paper, then the ADF is used. Otherwise the flatbed is scanned. Only single-page scanning is  
supported from the flatbed.  
The following scan settings used are for a default 300dpi scan:  
Resolution: 300dpi  
Width: 2550  
Height: 3500  
Quality: ImagePipeNormalQuality  
Compression: JPEG compression  
Image File Details  
The scanned file is saved as a .jpg image. A separate file is created for each page scanned.  
Scanned images are saved to a directory named "HP<model number>" at the root level of the memory  
card.  
The first scanned file is named HP0001.jpg. Each subsequent file name is incremented by one.  
The date and time linked to the newly created file will match the date and time on the device when the  
scan occurred. Therefore, the date and time must be set correctly in order for the date and time of the  
file to be correct.  
If the scan fails for any reason (ADF jam, cancel, etc…) the partial file is removed from the memory  
card. However, if the memory card is removed while writing, a partial file may still exist on the card.  
Error Conditions  
Scanner Failures  
If the paper jams in the ADF, or the paper is mispicked in the ADF, or the ADF door is opened while  
scanning, then the scan to card is stopped. The partial file is removed from the memory card. All scanned  
pages that were previously scanned remain on the memory card.  
Cancel scan  
If the user presses cancel while scanning to card, then the scan is stopped, and the partial file removed.  
All scanned pages that were previously scanned remain on the memory card.  
98 Chapter 11 Scan  
ENWW  
Memory card failures  
If the memory card is read-only, then the device is unable to scan to it. An error message is displayed  
when trying to scan to the card. Un-lock the card in order to scan to it.  
If the memory card is removed while scanning to it, then the scan is stopped. A partial file may still exist  
on the memory card.  
If the memory card is corrupt, then the scan is stopped, and an appropriate error message is displayed.  
Insert a valid memory card to continue scanning.  
If the memory card is full, then the scan is stopped and an appropriate error message is displayed.  
Delete files on the memory card or use a different card with sufficient available space to continue  
scanning.  
If the photo slots have been disabled an appropriate error message is displayed. Enable the photo slots  
to continue scanning.  
If there is no card inserted when trying to scan then an appropriate error message is displayed. Insert  
a memory card to continue scanning.  
Scan from the HP Scanning software  
Use the HP Scanning software to initiate picture, document, and film scans. If you choose to preview  
the scanned images or document pages in the HP Scanning window, you can adjust the image to  
achieve the size and effect that you want.  
The basic steps for scanning are:  
1. Place the original in the device. Look for the icons on the device to guide you in proper placement  
of the original.  
NOTE: If you place the original in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF), you must put the media  
into the feeder before you start a scan. Otherwise, scanning will occur from the scanner glass.  
2. Select HP Color LaserJet CM1312 MFP Series in the HP Solution Center.  
3. Click the Scan button for the type of original that you are scanning. The Scanning From... dialog  
box is displayed.  
4. Select a scan shortcut that defines the settings for the type of original that you are scanning and  
the scan destination that you want.  
5. Click Scan. If the HP Scanning window is displayed, adjust the images as you want, and then click  
Finish.  
Cancel scan  
To cancel a scan job, use one of the following procedures.  
On the product control panel, press Cancel.  
Click the Cancel button in the onscreen dialog box.  
If you cancel a scan job, remove the original from the flatbed scanner or from the automatic document  
feeder (ADF) input tray.  
ENWW  
Use scan 99  
   
Scan settings  
Scan file format  
The file format of a scanned document or photo depends on the scan type as well as the object being  
scanned.  
Scanning a document or a photo to a computer results in the file being saved as a .TIF file.  
Scanning a document to email results in the file being saved as a .PDF file.  
Scanning a photo to e-mail results in the file being saved as a .JPEG file.  
NOTE: Different file types can be selected when using the scan software program.  
Scanner resolution and color  
If you are printing a scanned image, and the quality is not what you expected, you might have selected  
a resolution or color setting in the scanner software that does not match your needs. Resolution and  
color affect the following features of scanned images:  
Image clarity  
Texture of gradations (smooth or rough)  
Scan time  
File size  
Scanning resolution is measured in pixels per inch (ppi).  
NOTE: Scanning ppi levels are not interchangeable with printing dpi (dots per inch) levels.  
Color, grayscale, and black and white define the number of colors possible. You can adjust the scanner  
hardware resolution to up to 1200 ppi. The software can perform an enhanced resolution up to  
19,200 ppi. You can set color and grayscale at 1 bit (black and white), or at 8 bit (256 levels of gray or  
color) to 24 bit (true color).  
The resolution and color guidelines table lists simple tips that you can follow to meet your scanning  
needs.  
NOTE: Setting the resolution and color to a high value can create large files that take up disk space  
and slow the scanning process. Before setting the resolution and color, determine how you are going  
to use the scanned image.  
NOTE: The best resolution for color and grayscale images is achieved by scanning from the flatbed  
scanner rather than from the automatic document feeder (ADF).  
100 Chapter 11 Scan  
ENWW  
           
Resolution and color guidelines  
The following table describes the recommended resolution and color settings for different types of scan  
jobs.  
Intended use  
Recommended resolution  
Recommended color settings  
Fax  
150 ppi  
150 ppi  
Black and White  
E-mail  
Black and White, if the image does  
not require smooth gradation  
Grayscale, if the image requires  
smooth gradation  
Color, if the image is in color  
Black and White  
Edit text  
300 ppi  
Print (graphics or text)  
600 ppi for complex graphics, or if you  
want to significantly enlarge the  
document  
Black and White for text and line art  
Grayscale for shaded or colored  
graphics and photos  
300 ppi for normal graphics and text  
150 ppi for photos  
Color, if the image is in color  
Display on screen  
75 ppi  
Black and White for text  
Grayscale for graphics and photos  
Color, if the image is in color  
Color  
You can set the color values to the following settings when scanning.  
Setting  
Recommended use  
Color  
Use this setting for high-quality color photos or documents in  
which the color is important.  
Black and White  
Grayscale  
Use this setting for text documents.  
Use this setting when file size is an issue or when you want a  
document or photograph to be scanned quickly.  
Scan quality  
Dirt, fingerprints, smudges, hair and other marks on the scanner glass slows scanner performance and  
affects the accuracy of special features such as fit-to-page and copy. To improve the quality of your  
copies and scans, clean the scanner glass. See Clean the scanner glass on page 184.  
ENWW  
Scan settings 101  
     
Scan a book (photo card models only)  
1. Lift the lid and place the book on the flatbed scanner with the page that you want to copy at the  
lower-right corner of the glass.  
2. Gently close the lid.  
102 Chapter 11 Scan  
ENWW  
 
3. Gently press down on the lid to press the book to the flatbed scanner surface.  
CAUTION: Pressing on the flatbed cover with too much force can break the lid hinges.  
4. Scan the book by using one of the scanning methods.  
ENWW  
Scan a book (photo card models only) 103  
Scan a photo  
1. Place the photo on the flatbed scanner with the picture-side down and the corner of the photo  
located as indicated by the icon on the scanner.  
2. Gently close the lid.  
3. Scan the photo by using one of the scanning methods.  
104 Chapter 11 Scan  
ENWW  
 
12 Fax (fax models only)  
NOTE: Many of the functions that are described in this chapter also can be performed by using  
HP ToolboxFX or the embedded Web server. For more information, see the HP ToolboxFX online Help  
For information about the fax controls on the control panel, see Control panel on page 7.  
ENWW  
105  
 
Fax features  
The product has the following fax features, which are available from the control panel or from the product  
software.  
Fax Setup Wizard for easy fax configuration  
Plain-paper analog fax with 50-page automatic document feeder (ADF) and output tray of up to  
125-page paper capacity  
120-entry phone book and 8 speed dials from the control panel  
Automatic redial  
Digital storage of up to 400 fax pages  
Fax forwarding  
Delayed sending of faxes  
Ring features: Configure rings to answer and distinctive ring compatibility (service required through  
local telecommunications company)  
Fax confirmation report  
Junk fax blocking  
Fax security  
Eight cover page templates available  
NOTE: Not all features are listed. The product software might need to be installed for some features  
to be available.  
106 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
 
Setup  
Install and connect the hardware  
Connect to a telephone line  
The product is an analog device. HP recommends using the product on a dedicated analog telephone  
line. For information about using the product with other telephone environments, see Use fax on a DSL,  
Connect additional devices  
The product includes two fax ports:  
The “line out” port ( ), which connects the product to the wall telephone jack.  
The “telephone” port ( ), which connects additional devices to the product.  
Telephones used in conjunction with the product can be employed in two ways:  
An extension phone is a phone plugged into the same phone line at another location.  
A downstream phone is one that is plugged into the product or a device that is plugged into the  
product.  
Connect additional devices in the order that is described in the following steps. The output port for each  
device is connected to the input port of the next, forming a "chain". If you do not want to connect a  
specific device, skip the step that explains it and continue to the next device.  
NOTE: Do not connect more than three devices to the telephone line.  
NOTE: Voicemail is not supported with this product.  
1. Unplug the power cords for all of the devices that you want to connect.  
2. If the product is not yet connected to a telephone line, see the getting started guide before  
proceeding. The product should already be connected to a telephone jack.  
3. Remove the plastic insert from the "telephone" port (the port that is marked with the telephone  
icon).  
4. To connect an internal or external modem on a computer, plug one end of a telephone cord into  
the product “telephone” port ( ). Plug the other end of the telephone cord into the modem “line”  
port.  
NOTE: Some modems have a second “line” port to connect to a dedicated voice line. If you have  
two “line” ports, see your modem documentation to make sure that you connect to the correct “line”  
port.  
ENWW  
Setup 107  
     
5. To connect a caller-ID box or a credit card scanner, plug a telephone cord into the previous device’s  
“telephone” port. Plug the other end of the telephone cord into the caller-ID box “line” port.  
6. To connect an answering machine, plug a telephone cord into the previous device’s “telephone”  
port. Plug the other end of the telephone cord into the answering machine “line” port (also called  
a TAM).  
7. To connect a telephone, plug a telephone cord into the previous device’s “telephone” port. Plug  
the other end of the telephone cord into the telephone “line” port (also called Faxtel).  
8. After you have finished connecting additional devices, plug all of the devices into their power  
sources.  
Set up fax with a telephone answering machine  
Set the product rings-to-answer setting for at least one ring more than the number of rings for which  
the answering machine is set.  
If an answering machine is connected to the same telephone line but on a different jack (in another  
room, for example), it might interfere with the product's ability to receive faxes.  
Setup for stand-alone fax  
1. Unpack and set up the product.  
2. Set the time, date, and fax header. See Configure fax settings on page 109.  
3. Set other settings as necessary to configure for the product environment.  
108 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
   
Use fax set-up wizard on the PC  
If you completed the software installation, you are ready to send faxes from your computer. If you did  
not complete the fax setup process at the time you installed the software, you can complete it at any  
time by using the Fax Setup Wizard.  
1. Click Start, and then click Programs.  
2. Click HP, click the name of the product, and then click HP Fax Setup Wizard.  
3. Follow the onscreen instructions in the HP Fax Setup Wizard to set the time, date, and fax header,  
as well as several other settings.  
Use the Fax Set-Up Utility  
1. At the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax Set-up Utility, and then press OK.  
3. Follow the on-screen prompts and select the appropriate response for each question using the  
arrow keys.  
Configure fax settings  
The product fax settings can be set from the control panel, from HP ToolboxFX, or from the embedded  
Web server. At the initial set-up process, the HP Fax Setup Wizard can be used to configure the settings.  
In the United States and many other countries/regions, setting the time, date, and other fax header  
information is a legal requirement.  
Use the control panel to set the fax time, date, and header  
To use the control panel to set the date, time, and header, complete the following steps:  
1. At the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select System setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Time/Date. Press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select the 12-hour clock or 24-hour clock, and then press OK.  
5. Use the alphanumeric buttons or the arrow buttons to enter the current time.  
6. Complete one of the following:  
For the 12-hour clock, use the arrow buttons to move past the fourth character. Use the up  
and down arrow buttons to select a.m. or p.m. Press OK.  
For the 24-hour clock, press OK.  
7. Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the current date. Use two digits to specify the month, day,  
and year. Press OK.  
Use the control panel to set the fax header  
1. At the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, then press OK.  
ENWW  
Setup 109  
   
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Basic setup, then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax Header, then press OK.  
5. Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter your fax number and your company name or header, and  
then press OK.  
NOTE: The maximum number of characters for the fax number is 20; use up to 25 characters for  
the company name.  
Use of common localized letters in fax headers  
When using the control panel to enter your name in the header or to enter a name for a one-touch key,  
speed-dial entry, or group-dial entry, press the appropriate alphanumeric button repeatedly until the  
letter that you need appears. Then, press the > button to select that letter and move to the next space.  
The following table shows which letters and numbers appear on each alphanumeric button.  
Key number  
Characters  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
1
A B C a b c 2  
D E F d e f 3  
G H I g h i 4  
J K L j k l 5  
M N O m n o 6  
P Q R S p q r s 7  
T U V t u v 8  
W X Y Z w x y z 9  
0
( ) + - . / , “ * & @ R W  
space # ,  
#
NOTE: Use > to move the cursor on the control panel and use < to delete characters.  
Manage the phone book  
You can store frequently dialed fax numbers or groups of fax numbers as speed dials or group-dial  
entries.  
In the product phone book, a total of 120 entries are available for speed dials and group-dial entries.  
For example, if you program 100 of the entries as speed-dials, the remaining 20 can be used for group-  
dials.  
NOTE: Speed dials and group-dial entries are more easily programmed from HP ToolboxFX or the  
embedded Web server. For more information, see the HP ToolboxFX online Help or Embedded Web  
110 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
   
Use phone-book data from other programs  
NOTE: Before a phone book from another program can be imported, you must use the export feature  
in that other program.  
HP ToolboxFX can import contact information from other software program phone books. The following  
table shows which programs are supported for HP ToolboxFX.  
Program  
Description  
Microsoft Outlook  
Personal Address Book (PAB) entries, Contacts entries, or both combined may be selected.  
Individuals and groups from the PAB are combined with individuals from Contacts only if the  
combined option is selected.  
If a Contacts entry has both a home and a business fax number, two entries will be displayed. The  
“name” of these two entries will be modified. “:(B)” will be added to the name in the business entry  
and “:(H)” will be added to the name in the home entry.  
If a duplicate entry occurs (one from Contacts and one from the PAB with the same name and fax  
number), a single entry will be displayed. However, if an entry exists in the PAB with a duplicate in  
Contacts, and the Contacts entry has both a business and a home fax number, all three entries will  
be displayed.  
Windows Address Book  
The Windows Address Book (WAB), used by Outlook Express and Internet Explorer, is supported.  
If an individual has both a home and a business fax number, two entries will be displayed. The  
“name” of these two entries will be modified. “:(B)” will be added to the name in the business entry  
and “:(H)” will be added to the name in the home entry.  
Goldmine  
Goldmine version 4.0 is supported. HP ToolboxFX imports the file last used by Goldmine.  
Act! versions 4.0 and 2000 are supported. HP ToolboxFX imports the database last used by Act!.  
Symantec Act!  
Complete the following steps to import a phone book:  
1. Open HP ToolboxFX.  
2. Click Fax, and then click Fax Phone Book.  
3. Browse to the program phone book, and then click Import/Export Phone Book.  
4. Click Import and choose Next.  
Delete phone book  
You can delete all speed dials and group-dial entries that are programmed in the product.  
CAUTION: After speed dials and group-dial entries are deleted, they cannot be recovered.  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Phone Book, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Delete All Entries, and then press OK.  
4. Press OK to confirm the deletion.  
ENWW  
Setup 111  
   
Special dialing symbols and options  
You can insert pauses into a fax number that you are dialing or programming to a one-touch key, speed-  
dial entry, or group-dial entry. Pauses are often needed when dialing internationally or connecting to an  
outside line.  
Insert a dialing pause: Press # (Pause) repeatedly until a comma (,) appears on the control-panel  
display, indicating that the pause will occur at that point in the dialing sequence. This is a 2-second  
pause (3 seconds in France).  
Insert a pause for dial tone: Press * (Symbols) repeatedly until W appears on the control-panel  
display to have the product wait for a dial tone before dialing the remainder of the telephone  
number.  
Insert a hook flash: Press * (Symbols) repeatedly until R appears on the control-panel display to  
have the product perform a hook flash.  
Manage speed dials  
Create and edit speed dials  
Speed dials 1 through 8 are also associated with their corresponding one-touch keys on the control  
panel. The one-touch keys can be used for speed dials or group-dial entries. A maximum of 50  
characters can be entered for a single fax number.  
NOTE: To gain access to all of the speed dials, you must use the Shift button. Speed dials 5 through  
8 are all available by pressing Shift and the associated one-touch key on the control panel.  
Complete the following steps to program speed dials from the control panel:  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Phone Book, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Individual Setup. Press OK.  
4. Press OK to select Add.  
5. Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter a name for the fax number. To do so, repeatedly press the  
alphanumeric button for the letter that you need until the letter appears. (For a list of characters,  
NOTE: To insert punctuation, press the asterisk (*) button repeatedly until the character that you  
want appears, and then press the > button to go to the next space.  
6. Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the fax number. Include any pauses or other needed  
numbers, such as an area code, an access code for numbers outside a PBX system (usually a 9  
or 0), or a long distance prefix.  
NOTE: When entering a fax number, press Pause until a comma (,) appears if you want to insert  
a pause in the dialing sequence, or press * until W appears if you want the product to wait for a  
dial tone.  
7. Press OK.  
8. Press OK to save the information.  
9. If you have more speed dials to program, repeat steps 1 through 10.  
112 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
     
Delete speed dials  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Phone Book, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Delete entry, and then press OK.  
4. Use the alphanumeric buttons or the arrow buttons to enter the number of the speed-dial entry you  
want to delete, and then press OK.  
Manage group-dial entries  
Create and edit group-dial entries  
1. Assign a speed-dial entry to each fax number that you want in the group. (For instructions, see  
2. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Phone Book, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Group setup, and then press OK.  
5. Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the number that you want to associate with this group, and  
then press OK. Selecting 1 through 8 also associates the group with the corresponding one-touch  
key.  
6. Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter a name for the group, and then press OK.  
7. Press a one-touch key, and then press OK again to confirm the addition. Repeat this step for each  
group member you want to add.  
-or-  
Use the up and down arrows to select an entry and press OK to add the entry to the group. Press  
OK again when done adding entries.  
8. When you are finished, press OK.  
9. If you have more group-dial entries to assign, press OK, and then repeat steps 1 through 9.  
Delete an individual from a group-dial entry  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Phone Book, and then press OK.  
ENWW  
Setup 113  
   
3. To delete a single entry:  
a. Use the arrow buttons to select Delete entry, and then press OK.  
b. Use the arrow buttons to select the individual or group that you want to delete from the list on  
the screen.  
c. Press OK to confirm the deletion.  
4. To delete all entries:  
a. Use the arrow buttons to select Delete All Entries, and then press OK.  
b. Press OK to confirm the deletion.  
NOTE: Deleting a speed-dial entry also deletes that entry from any group-dial entries that included  
that speed-dial entry.  
Set fax polling  
If someone else has set up a fax to be polled, you can request that the fax be sent to your product. (This  
is known as polling another machine).  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Receive, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Polling receive, and then press OK.  
4. Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter the number that you want to poll, then press OK.  
The product dials the other fax machine and requests the fax.  
114 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
   
Change fax settings  
Set the sound-volume settings  
Control the volume of the fax sounds from the control panel. You can make changes to the following  
sounds:  
The fax sounds that are associated with incoming and outgoing faxes  
The ring for incoming faxes  
The factory-set default for the fax-sounds volume is Soft.  
Set the phone-line volume  
Complete the following steps to change the fax-sounds volume.  
1. On the control panel press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select System setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Volume Settings, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Phone line volume, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud.  
6. Press OK to save the selection.  
Set the ring volume  
When the product is initially receiving a call, a ring alert is audible. The ring duration length is based on  
the local telephone company ring-pattern length. The factory-set default for the ring volume is Soft.  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select System setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Volume Settings, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Ring volume, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud.  
6. Press OK to save the selection.  
Send fax settings  
Set a dial prefix  
A dial prefix is a number or group of numbers that are automatically added to the beginning of every fax  
number you enter at the control panel or from the software. The maximum number of characters for a  
dial prefix is 50.  
The default setting is Off. Turn this setting on to enter a prefix if, for example, you have to dial a number  
such as 9 to get a telephone line outside of your company telephone system. While this setting is  
ENWW  
Change fax settings 115  
         
activated, you can dial a fax number without the dial prefix by using manual dial. For instructions, see  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Basic setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Dial Prefix, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off, and then press OK.  
6. If you selected On, use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the prefix, and then press OK. You can  
use numbers, pauses, and dialing symbols.  
Set the dial-tone detection  
Normally, the product begins dialing a fax number immediately. If you are using the product on the same  
line as your telephone, turn on the detect-dial-tone setting. This prevents the product from sending a  
fax while someone is on the telephone.  
The factory-set default for detect dial tone is On for France and Hungary, and Off for all other countries/  
regions.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Detect dial tone, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off, and then press OK.  
Set autoredial  
If the product was unable to send a fax because the receiving fax machine did not answer or was busy,  
the product attempts to redial based on the redial-on-busy, redial-on-no-answer, and redial-on-  
communication-error options. Use the procedures in this section to turn these options on or off.  
Set the redial-on-busy option  
If this option is turned on, the product redials automatically if it receives a busy signal. The factory-set  
default for the redial-on-busy option is On.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Redial if busy, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off, and then press OK.  
116 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
     
Set the redial-on-no-answer option  
If this option is turned on, the product redials automatically if the receiving machine does not answer.  
The factory-set default for the redial-on-no-answer option is Off.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Redial if no answer, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off, and then press OK.  
Set the redial-on-communication-error option  
If this option is turned on, the product redials automatically if some sort of communication error occurs.  
The factory-set default for the redial-on-communication-error option is On.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Redial Comm. Error, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off, and then press OK.  
Set light/dark and resolution  
Set the default light/dark (contrast) setting  
The contrast affects the lightness and darkness of an outgoing fax as it is being sent.  
The default light/dark setting is the contrast that is normally applied to items that are being faxed. The  
slider is set to the middle as the default setting.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Default lighter/darker, and then press OK.  
5. Use the < button to move the slider to the left to make the fax lighter than the original, or use the  
> button to move the slider to the right to make the fax darker than the original.  
6. Press OK to save the selection.  
Set resolution settings  
NOTE: Increasing the resolution increases the fax size. Larger faxes increase the send time and could  
exceed the available memory in the product.  
The factory-set default resolution setting is Fine.  
ENWW  
Change fax settings 117  
     
Use this procedure to change the default resolution for all fax jobs to one of the following settings:  
Standard: This setting provides the lowest quality and the fastest transmission time.  
Fine: This setting provides a higher resolution quality than Standard that is usually appropriate for  
text documents.  
Superfine: This setting is best used for documents that mix text and images. The transmission  
time is slower than Fine but faster than Photo.  
Photo: This setting produces the best images, but greatly increases the transmission time.  
Set the default resolution setting  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Default Fax Resolution, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to change the resolution setting.  
6. Press OK to save the selection.  
Set the resolution for the current fax job  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Send, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax Resolution, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select the appropriate resolution setting.  
5. Press OK to save the selection.  
Set the default glass-size setting  
This setting determines which paper size the flatbed scanner scans when you send a fax from the  
scanner. The factory-set default is determined by the country/region in which you purchased the product.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Default glass size, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select the correct paper size setting: A4 or Letter.  
6. Press OK to save the selection.  
118 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
   
Set tone-dialing or pulse-dialing  
Use this procedure to set the product to tone-dialing or pulse-dialing mode. The factory-set default is  
Tone. Do not change this setting unless you know that the telephone line cannot use tone dialing.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Dialing Mode, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select Tone or Pulse, and then press OK to save the selection.  
NOTE: The pulse-dialing option is not available in all countries/regions.  
Set billing codes  
If the billing codes feature has been turned on, the user will be asked to enter a billing code for each  
fax. The billing code count is increased for each fax page that is sent. This includes all types of faxes  
except for poll-received, fax-forwarded, or computer-downloaded faxes. For an undefined group or a  
group-dial fax, the billing code count is increased for each successful fax that is sent to each destination.  
To print a report that shows the total for each billing code, see Print the billing-code report  
The factory-set default for the billing-code setting is Off. The billing code can be any number from 1  
through 250.  
Set the billing-code setting  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Billing codes, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off, and then press OK.  
Use billing codes  
1. Load the document in the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray or on the flatbed scanner.  
2. On the control panel, enter the phone number manually, by speed-dial, or by group-dial entry.  
3. Press Start Fax.  
4. Enter the billing code, and then press Start Fax.  
The fax job is sent and recorded in the billing-code report. For information about printing the billing-code  
Print the billing-code report  
The billing-code report is a printed list of all of the fax billing codes and the total number of faxes that  
have been billed to each code. The billing-code setting must be turned on in order to access this report.  
ENWW  
Change fax settings 119  
     
NOTE: After this report is printed, all billing data is deleted.  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Billing report, and then press OK. The product exits the menu  
settings and prints the report.  
Receive fax settings  
Set or change number of rings-to-answer  
When the answer mode is set to Automatic, the product rings-to-answer setting determines the number  
of times the telephone rings before the product answers an incoming call.  
If the product is connected to a line that receives both fax and voice calls (a shared line) and that also  
uses an answering machine, you might need to adjust the rings-to-answer setting. The number of rings-  
to-answer for the product must be greater than the rings-to-answer on the answering machine. This  
allows the answering machine to answer the incoming call and record a message if it is a voice call.  
When the answering machine answers the call, the product listens to the call and automatically answers  
it if it detects fax tones.  
The default setting for rings-to-answer is five for the U.S. and Canada, and two for other countries/  
regions.  
Use the rings-to-answer setting  
Use the following table to determine the number of rings-to-answer to use.  
Type of telephone line  
Recommended rings-to-answer setting  
Dedicated fax line (receiving only fax calls)  
Set to a number of rings within the range shown on the control-  
panel display. (The minimum and maximum number of rings  
allowed varies by country/region.)  
One line with two separate numbers and a ring-pattern service One or two rings. (If you have an answering machine or  
computer voicemail for the other telephone number, make sure  
that the product is set to a greater number of rings than the  
answering system. Also, use the distinctive-ring feature to  
differentiate between voice and fax calls. See Set up distinctive  
Shared line (receiving both fax and voice calls) with only an  
attached telephone  
Five rings or more.  
Shared line (receiving both fax and voice calls) with an  
attached answering machine or computer voicemail  
Two rings more than the answering machine or computer  
voicemail.  
Set the number of rings-to-answer  
To set or change the number of rings-to-answer, use the following steps:  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Basic setup, and then press OK.  
120 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
     
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Rings to answer, and then press OK.  
5. Use the alphanumeric buttons or the up and down arrows to enter the number of rings-to-answer,  
and then press OK.  
Set the answer mode  
Depending on the situation, set the product answer mode to Automatic or Manual. The factory-set  
default is Automatic.  
Automatic: In this answer mode, the product answers incoming calls after a specified number of  
rings or upon recognition of special fax tones. To specify the number of rings, see Set the number  
TAM: In this answer mode, the product has a telephone answering machine (TAM) attached to the  
line-out port. The product does not answer incoming calls, but listens for fax call tones after the  
TAM has answered the call.  
Fax/Tel: In this answer mode, the product answers an incoming call and determines if the call is  
a voice call or fax call. If the call is a fax call, the product receives the fax from the call. If the call  
is a voice call, the product generates an audible ring to indicate an incoming voice call that you  
must answer on an extension phone.  
Manual: In this answer mode, the product never answers calls. You must start the fax-receiving  
process yourself, either by pressing Start Fax on the control panel or by picking up a telephone  
that is connected to that line and dialing 1-2-3.  
To set or change the answer mode, complete the following steps:  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Basic setup, and then press OK.  
4. Press OK to select Answer mode.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select the answer mode, and then press OK.  
The control-panel display shows the answer mode setting that you specified.  
Set fax forwarding  
You can set your product to forward incoming faxes to another fax number. When the fax arrives at your  
product, it is stored in the memory. The product then dials the fax number that you have specified and  
sends the fax. If the product cannot forward a fax because of an error (for example, the number is busy)  
and repeated redial attempts are unsuccessful, your product prints the fax.  
If the product runs out of memory while receiving a fax, it terminates the incoming fax and only forwards  
the pages and partial pages that have been stored in the memory.  
When it is using the fax-forwarding feature, the answer mode must be set to Automatic.  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Receive, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Forward fax, and then press OK.  
ENWW  
Change fax settings 121  
   
4. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off, and then press OK.  
5. If you turn on the fax-forwarding feature, use the alphanumeric buttons to specify the fax number  
where the fax is to be sent, and then press OK to save the selection.  
Set up distinctive ring  
Ring-pattern or distinctive-ring service is available through some local telephone companies. The  
service allows you to have more than one telephone number on a single line. Each telephone number  
has a unique ring pattern, so that you can answer voice calls and the product can answer fax calls.  
If you subscribe to a ring-pattern service with a telephone company, you must set the product to answer  
the correct ring pattern. Not all countries/regions support unique ring patterns. Contact the telephone  
company to determine if this service is available in your country/region.  
NOTE: If you do not have ring-pattern service and you change the ring-pattern settings to something  
other than the default, All Rings, the product might not be able to receive faxes.  
The settings are as follows:  
All Rings: The product answers any calls that come through the telephone line.  
Single: The product answers any calls that produce a single-ring pattern.  
Double: The product answers any calls that produce a double-ring pattern.  
Triple: The product answers any calls that produce a triple-ring pattern.  
Double and Triple: The product answers any calls that produce a double-ring or triple-ring pattern.  
To change ring patterns for call answering, complete the following steps:  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Basic setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Distinctive Ring, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select the ring pattern that you want, and then press OK.  
6. After product installation is complete, ask someone to send a fax to you in order to verify that the  
ring-pattern service is working correctly.  
Use autoreduction for incoming faxes  
If the fit-to-page option is turned on, the product automatically reduces long faxes up to 75% to fit the  
information on the default paper size (for example, the fax is reduced from legal to letter size).  
If the fit-to-page option is turned off, long faxes print at full size on multiple pages. The factory-set default  
for incoming fax autoreduction is On.  
If you have the stamp-received faxes option turned on, you might also want to turn on autoreduction.  
This reduces the size of the incoming faxes slightly, and prevents the page-stamp from forcing a fax  
onto two pages.  
122 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
     
NOTE: Make sure that the default media size setting matches the size of the media that is loaded in  
the tray.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Fit to page, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off, and then press OK to save the selection.  
Set the default fax reprint settings  
The default fax reprint setting is On. To change this setting from the control panel, complete the following  
steps:  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Allow Fax Reprint, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off, and then press OK.  
NOTE: To reprint a fax, see Reprint a fax on page 136.  
Create stamp-received faxes  
The product prints the sender identification information at the top of each received fax. You can also  
choose to have your own header information included on each received fax to confirm the date and time  
that the fax was received. The factory-set default for stamp-received faxes is Off.  
NOTE: This option applies only to received faxes that the product prints.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Stamp faxes, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off, and then press OK to save the selection.  
Block or unblock fax numbers  
If you do not want to receive faxes from specific people or businesses, you can block as many as 30  
fax numbers by using the control panel. When you block a fax number and someone from that number  
sends you a fax, the control-panel display indicates that the number is blocked, the fax is received and  
discarded. The fax does not print, and is not saved in memory. Faxes from blocked fax numbers appear  
in the fax activity log with a “discarded” designation. You can unblock blocked fax numbers individually  
or all at one time.  
NOTE: The sender of a blocked fax is not notified that the fax failed.  
ENWW  
Change fax settings 123  
   
To print a list of numbers that you have blocked or the fax activity log, see Print individual fax reports  
Complete the following steps to block or unblock fax numbers by using the control panel:  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Receive, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Block junk faxes, and then press OK.  
4. To block a fax number, use the arrow buttons to select Add number, and then press OK. Enter  
the fax number exactly as it appears in the header (including spaces), and then press OK.  
To unblock a single fax number, use the arrow buttons to select Delete number, and then press  
OK. Use the arrow buttons to select the fax number that you want to delete, and then press OK to  
confirm the deletions.  
-or-  
To unblock all blocked fax numbers, use the arrow buttons to select Delete all numbers, and then  
press OK. Press OK again to confirm the deletions.  
Make an extension telephone available to receive faxes  
With this setting turned on, you can alert the product to pick up the incoming fax call by pressing 1-2-3  
sequentially on the telephone keypad. The default setting is On. Turn this setting off only if you use  
pulse dialing or if you have a service from your telephone company that also uses the 1-2-3 sequence.  
The telephone company service does not work if it conflicts with the product.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Extension Phone, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off, and then press OK to save the selection.  
124 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
   
Use fax  
Fax software  
Supported fax programs  
The PC fax program that came with the product is the only PC fax program that works with the product.  
In order to continue to use a PC fax program previously installed on the computer, it must be used with  
the modem that is already connected to the computer; it will not function through the product modem.  
Available cover-page templates  
Several business and personal fax cover-page templates are available in the HP LaserJet Send Fax  
software program.  
NOTE: Cover-sheet templates cannot be altered. While fields within the templates may be edited, the  
templates themselves are fixed forms.  
Customize a fax cover sheet  
1. Open the HP LaserJet Send Fax software program.  
2. In the Fax To section, provide the recipient fax number, name, and company.  
3. In the Resolution section, select a resolution setting.  
4. In the Include With Fax section, select Cover Page.  
5. Add more information in the Notes and Subject text boxes.  
6. In the Cover Page Template drop-down box, select a template.  
7. Do one of the following:  
Click Send Now to send the fax without previewing the cover page.  
Click Preview to view the cover page prior to sending the fax.  
Cancel a fax  
Use these instructions to cancel a single fax that is currently dialing or a fax that is being transmitted or  
received.  
Cancel the current fax  
Press Cancel on the control panel. Any pages that have not been transmitted are canceled. Pressing  
Cancel also stops group-dial jobs.  
Cancel a pending fax job  
Use this procedure to cancel a fax job in the following situations:  
The product is waiting to redial after encountering a busy signal, an unanswered call, or a  
communication error.  
The fax is scheduled to be sent at a future time.  
ENWW  
Use fax 125  
       
Use the following steps to cancel a fax job by using the Fax Job status menu:  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Send, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax Job status, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through pending jobs until you reach the job that you want to clear.  
5. Press OK to select the job that you want to cancel.  
Delete faxes from memory  
Use this procedure only if you are concerned that someone else has access to your product and might  
try to reprint faxes from the memory.  
CAUTION: In addition to clearing the reprint memory, this procedure clears any fax that is currently  
being sent, unsent faxes that are pending redial, faxes that are scheduled to be sent at a future time,  
and faxes that are not printed or forwarded.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Service, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax Service, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Clear saved faxes, and then press OK.  
5. Press OK to confirm the deletion.  
Use fax on a DSL, PBX, ISDN, or VoIP system  
HP products are designed specifically for use with traditional analog phone services. They are not  
designed to work on DSL, PBX, ISDN lines, or VoIP services, but they might work with the proper setup  
and equipment.  
NOTE: HP recommends discussing DSL, PBX, ISDN, and VoIP setup options with the service  
provider.  
The HP LaserJet product is an analog device that is not compatible with all digital phone environments  
(unless a digital-to-analog converter is used). HP does not guarantee that the product will be compatible  
with digital environments or digital-to-analog converters.  
DSL  
A digital subscriber line (DSL) uses digital technology over standard copper telephone wires. This  
product is not directly compatible with digital signals. However, if the configuration is specified during  
DSL setup, the signal can be separated so that some of the bandwidth is used to transmit an analog  
signal (for voice and fax) while the remaining bandwidth is used to transmit digital data.  
NOTE: Not all fax products are compatible with DSL services. HP does not guarantee that the product  
will be compatible with all DSL service lines or providers.  
The DSL modem requires a high-pass filter for faxing. The service provider typically provides a low-pass  
filter, for normal telephone wiring.  
NOTE: Contact the DSL provider for more information or for assistance.  
126 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
     
PBX  
The product is an analog device that is not compatible in all digital phone environments. Digital-to-analog  
filters or converters may be needed for faxing functionality. If faxing issues occur in a PBX environment,  
it might be necessary to contact the PBX provider for assistance. HP does not guarantee that the product  
will be compatible with digital environments or digital-to-analog converters.  
Contact the PBX provider for more information and for assistance.  
ISDN  
VoIP  
Contact the ISDN provider for more information and for assistance.  
Voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services are often not compatible with fax machines unless the  
provider explicitly states that it supports fax over IP services.  
If the product experiences problems getting a fax to work on a VoIP network, verify that all cables and  
settings are correct. Decreasing the fax-speed setting might allow the product to send a fax over a VoIP  
network.  
If faxing problems continue, contact the VoIP provider.  
Send a fax  
Fax from the flatbed scanner  
1. Make sure that the automatic document feeder (ADF) contains no media.  
2. Lift the flatbed scanner cover.  
3. Place the original document face-down on the flatbed scanner with the upper-left corner of the  
document at the corner indicated by the icon on the scanner.  
4. Gently close the lid.  
5. Use the alphanumeric buttons on the control panel to dial the number.  
-or-  
If the fax number you are calling has been assigned to a one-touch key, press that key.  
-or-  
ENWW  
Use fax 127  
 
If the fax number you are calling has a speed dial or group-dial entry, press Fax Menu, then use  
the arrow keys to select Phone Book. Choose Select an entry and use the alphanumeric buttons  
to specify the speed dial or group-dial entry, and then press OK.  
6. On the control panel, press Start Fax.  
The control-panel display shows the following message: Send from flatbed scanner?.  
7. Select Yes.  
8. After scanning the page, the product control-panel display shows the following message: Scan  
another page?.  
9. If you have more pages to scan, select Yes, and then repeat step 3 for each page of the fax job.  
-or-  
If you are finished, select No.  
Fax from the automatic document feeder (ADF)  
NOTE: The ADF capacity is up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 or 20 lb media.  
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the product, do not use an original that contains correction tape,  
correction fluid, paper clips, or staples. Also, do not load photographs, originals smaller than 5x5, or  
fragile originals into the ADF. Use the flatbed glass to scan these items.  
1. Insert the top-end of the stack of originals into the ADF input tray, with the media stack face-up  
and the first page to be copied on top of the stack.  
If the media is longer than Letter- or A4-sized paper, pull out the ADF input tray extension to support  
the media.  
2. Slide the stack into the ADF until it does not move any farther.  
Document loaded appears on the control-panel display.  
128 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
3. Adjust the media guides until they are snug against the media without restricting movement.  
4. Use the alphanumeric buttons on the control panel to dial the number.  
-or-  
If the fax number you are calling has been assigned to a one-touch key, press that key.  
-or-  
If the fax number you are calling has a speed dial or group-dial entry, press Fax Menu, then use  
the arrow keys to select Phone Book. Choose Select an entry and use the alphanumeric buttons  
to specify the speed dial or group-dial entry, and then press OK.  
5. On the control panel, press Start Fax. The product starts the fax job.  
Manual dial faxing  
Usually, the product dials after you press Start Fax. At times, however, you might want the product to  
dial each number as you press it. For example, if you are charging your fax call to a calling card, you  
might need to dial the fax number, wait for the acceptance tone of your telephone company, and then  
dial the calling card number. When dialing internationally, you might need to dial part of the number and  
then listen for dial tones before continuing to dial.  
Dial manually with the automatic document feeder (ADF)  
1. Load the document into the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray.  
2. On the control panel, press Start Fax.  
3. Begin dialing.  
NOTE: The product dials the number as you press each digit. This allows you to wait for pauses,  
dial tones, international-access tones, or calling-card-acceptance tones before continuing to dial.  
ENWW  
Use fax 129  
   
Dial manually with the flatbed scanner  
1. On the control panel, press Start Fax.  
The control-panel display shows the following message: Send from flatbed scanner?.  
2. Select Yes. The control-panel display shows the following message: Load page: X Press OK,  
where X is the page number.  
3. Scan a page into memory by placing the sheet print-side-down on the flatbed scanner and pressing  
OK. After scanning the page, the product control-panel display shows the following message: Scan  
another page?.  
4. If you have more pages to scan, select Yes, and then repeat step 3 for each page of the fax job.  
-or-  
If you are finished, select No, and then go to the next step.  
5. When all pages are scanned into memory, begin dialing. The product dials the number as you  
press each digit. This allows you to wait for pauses, dial tones, international access tones, or calling  
card acceptance tones before continuing to dial.  
Send a fax to a group manually (ad hoc faxing)  
Use the following instructions to send a fax to a group of recipients that has not been assigned a group-  
dial entry:  
1. Load the document into the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray or on the flatbed scanner.  
2. Use the alphanumeric buttons.  
-or-  
If the fax number that you are calling has been assigned a speed-dial entry, press Fax Menu, then  
select Phone Book. Choose Select an entry and use the alphanumeric buttons to specify the  
speed-dial entry, and then press OK.  
3. Press OK.  
4. To continue dialing numbers, repeat steps 2 and 3.  
-or-  
If you are finished dialing numbers, go to the next step.  
5. Press Start Fax. If the pages that you want to send are in the ADF, then faxing begins automatically.  
6. If the product ADF sensor detects that no document is loaded into the ADF input tray, Send from  
flatbed scanner? appears on the control-panel display. To send the fax from the flatbed scanner,  
select Yes, and then press OK.  
Load Page: X Press OK appears on the control-panel display.  
7. If you have already placed the document on the flatbed scanner, press OK (or place the document  
on the flatbed scanner and then press OK).  
After scanning the page, Another page? appears on the control-panel display.  
8. If you have more pages to scan, select Yes, and then repeat step 7 for each page of the fax job.  
130 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
 
-or-  
If you are finished, select No.  
The product sends the fax to each fax number. If a number in the group is busy or does not answer, the  
product redials that number based on the redial setting. If all redial attempts fail, the product updates  
the fax activity log by adding the error, and then it proceeds to the next number in the group.  
Redial manually  
1. Load the document into the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray or onto the flatbed  
scanner.  
2. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
3. Use the arrow keys to select Send and press OK.  
4. Use the arrow keys to select Redial and press OK.  
5. Press Start Fax. If the pages that you want to send are in the ADF, then faxing begins automatically.  
6. If the product ADF sensor detects that no document is loaded into the ADF input tray, Send from  
flatbed scanner? appears on the control-panel display. To send the fax from the flatbed scanner,  
select Yes, and then press OK.  
After you press OK, Load page: X Press OK appears on the control-panel display.  
7. If you have already placed the document on the flatbed scanner, press OK (or place the document  
on the flatbed scanner and then press OK).  
After scanning the page, Another page? appears on the control-panel display.  
8. If you have more pages to scan, select Yes, and then repeat step 7 for each page of the fax job.  
-or-  
If you are finished, select No.  
The product sends the fax to the number that it redialed. If the number is busy or does not answer, the  
product redials the number based on its redial setting. If all redial attempts fail, the product updates the  
fax activity log by adding the error.  
Use speed dials and group-dial entries  
Send a fax by using a speed dial  
1. Load the document into the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray or on the flatbed scanner.  
2. Press the one-touch key for the speed dial.  
-or-  
Press Fax Menu, then select Phone Book. Choose Select an entry and use the alphanumeric  
buttons to specify the speed-dial entry, and then press OK.  
3. Load the document into the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray or on the flatbed scanner.  
4. Press Start Fax. If the pages that you want to send are in the ADF, then faxing begins automatically.  
ENWW  
Use fax 131  
     
5. If the product ADF sensor detects that no document is loaded into the ADF input tray, Send from  
flatbed scanner? appears on the control-panel display. To send the fax from the flatbed scanner,  
select Yes, and then press OK.  
After you press OK, Load page: X Press OK appears on the control-panel display.  
6. If you have already placed the document on the flatbed scanner, press OK (or place the document  
on the flatbed scanner and then press OK).  
After scanning the page, Scan another page? appears on the control-panel display.  
7. If you have more pages to scan, select Yes, and then repeat step 6 for each page of the fax job.  
-or-  
If you are finished, select No.  
When the last page of the fax has exited the product, you can start sending another fax, copying, or  
scanning.  
You can assign a speed dial to numbers that you use regularly. See Create and edit speed dials  
on page 112. If you have electronic phone books available, you might be able to use them to select  
recipients. Electronic phone books are generated by using third-party software programs.  
Send a fax by using a group-dial entry  
1. Load the document into the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray or on the flatbed scanner.  
2. Press the one-touch key for the group.  
-or-  
Press Fax Menu, then select Phone Book. Choose Select an entry and use the alphanumeric  
buttons to specify the group-dial entry, and then press OK.  
3. Press Start Fax. If the pages that you want to send are in the ADF, then faxing begins automatically.  
4. If the product ADF sensor detects that no document is loaded into the ADF input tray, Send from  
flatbed scanner? appears on the control-panel display. To send the fax from the flatbed scanner,  
select Yes, and then press OK.  
After you press OK, Load page: X Press OK appears on the control-panel display.  
5. If you have already placed the document on the flatbed scanner, press OK (or place the document  
on the flatbed scanner and then press OK).  
After scanning the page, Scan another page? appear on the control-panel display.  
6. If you have more pages to scan, select Yes, and then repeat step 5 for each page of the fax job.  
-or-  
If you are finished, select No.  
The product scans the document into memory and sends the fax to each number specified. If a number  
in the group is busy or does not answer, the product redials the number based on its redial setting. If all  
redial attempts fail, the product updates the fax activity log with the error and proceeds to the next  
number in the group.  
132 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
 
Send a fax from the software  
This section contains basic instructions for sending faxes by using the software that came with the  
product. All other software-related topics are covered in the software Help, which can be opened from  
the software-program Help menu.  
You can fax electronic documents from a computer if you meet the following requirements:  
The product is connected directly to the computer or connected to the computer over a TCP/IP  
network.  
The product software is installed on the computer.  
The computer operating system is Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Mac OS X v10.3, or  
Mac OS X v10.4.  
Send a fax from the software (Windows XP or Vista)  
The procedure to send a fax varies according to your specifications. The most typical steps follow.  
1. Click Start, click Programs (or All Programs in Windows XP), and then click Hewlett-Packard.  
2. Click HP LaserJet product, and then click Send fax. The fax software appears.  
3. Enter the fax number of one or more recipients.  
4. Load the document in the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray.  
5. Include a cover page. (This step is optional.)  
6. Click Send Now.  
Send a fax from the software (Mac OS X v10.3)  
1. Load the document into the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray or the flatbed scanner.  
2. Open HP Director and click Fax. The fax software appears.  
3. Select Fax from the Print dialog.  
4. Enter the fax number of one or more recipients.  
5. Include a cover page (this step is optional).  
6. Click Fax.  
Send a fax from the software (Mac OS X v10.4)  
Using Mac OS X v10.4, you can choose between two methods of sending faxes from the product  
software.  
To send a fax by using HP Director complete the following steps:  
1. Load the document into the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray or the flatbed scanner.  
2. Open HP Director by clicking the icon in the dock, and then click Fax. The Apple print dialog  
appears.  
3. Select Fax PDF from the PDF pop-up menu.  
4. Enter the fax number of one or more recipients under To.  
ENWW  
Use fax 133  
     
5. Select the product under Modem.  
6. Click Fax.  
To send a fax by printing to a fax driver, complete the following steps:  
1. Open the document that you want to fax.  
2. Click File and then click Print.  
3. Select Fax PDF from the PDF pop-up menu.  
4. Enter the fax number of one or more recipients under To.  
5. Select the product under Modem.  
6. Click Fax.  
Send a fax from a third-party software program, such as Microsoft Word (all operating systems)  
1. Open a document in a third-party program.  
2. Click the File menu, and then click Print.  
3. Select the fax print driver from the printer driver drop-down list. The fax software appears.  
4. Complete one of the following procedures:  
Windows  
a. Enter the fax number of one or more recipients.  
b. Include a cover page. (This step is optional.)  
c. Include any pages loaded at the product. (This step is optional.)  
d. Click Send Now.  
Macintosh  
a. Mac OS X v10.3: Select Fax from the Print dialog.  
-or-  
Mac OS X v10.4: Select Fax PDF from the PDF pop-up menu.  
b. Enter the fax number of one or more recipients.  
c. Mac OS X v10.3: Include a cover page (this step is optional).  
-or-  
Mac OS X v10.4: Select the product under Modem.  
d. Click Fax.  
134 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
 
Send a fax by dialing from a downstream phone  
Occasionally, you might want to dial a fax number from a telephone that is connected to the same line  
as the product. For example, if you are sending a fax to a person whose device is in the manual receive  
mode, you can precede the fax with a voice call to let that person know that the fax is coming.  
NOTE: The telephone must be connected to the product "telephone" port ( ).  
1. Load the document into the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray.  
NOTE: You cannot use the flatbed scanner when sending a fax by dialing from an extension  
telephone.  
2. Pick up the handset of a telephone that is connected to the same line as the product. Dial the fax  
number by using the telephone keypad.  
3. When the recipient answers, instruct the person to start the fax machine.  
4. When you hear the fax tones, press Start Fax, wait until Connecting appears on the control-panel  
display, and then hang up the telephone or wait on the line until the fax is completed to resume  
voice calling.  
Send a delayed fax  
Use the product control panel to schedule a fax to be sent automatically at a future time to one or more  
people. When this procedure is completed, the product scans the document into memory and then  
returns to the Ready state.  
NOTE: If the product cannot transmit the fax at the scheduled time, that information is indicated on  
the fax error report (if that option is turned on) or recorded in the fax activity log. The transmittal might  
not be initiated because the fax-sending call is not answered, or because a busy signal stops the redial  
attempts.  
If a fax has been scheduled to be sent at a future time but it requires updating, send the additional  
information as another job. All faxes that are scheduled to go to the same fax number at the same time  
are delivered as individual faxes.  
1. Load the document into the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray or onto the flatbed  
scanner.  
2. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
3. Use the arrow buttons until Send appears, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons until Send fax later appears, and then press OK.  
5. Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the time.  
6. If the product is set to the 12-hour time mode, use the arrow buttons to move to A.M. or P.M. Select  
A.M. or select P.M., and then press OK.  
-or-  
If the product is set to the 24-hour time mode, press OK.  
7. Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the date, and then press OK.  
-or-  
ENWW  
Use fax 135  
   
Accept the default date by pressing OK.  
8. Enter the fax number, enter the speed dial, or press the one-touch key. Access the phone book by  
pressing Fax Menu on the control panel and then selecting Phone Book.  
NOTE: This feature does not support undefined (ad hoc) groups.  
9. Press OK or Start Fax. The product scans the document into memory and sends it at the designated  
time.  
Use access codes, credit cards, or calling cards  
To use access codes, credit cards, or calling cards, dial manually to allow for pauses and dialing codes.  
Send faxes internationally  
To send a fax to an international destination, dial manually to allow for pauses and international dialing  
Receive a fax  
When the product receives a fax transmission, it prints the fax (unless the private-receive feature is  
enabled) and also stores it automatically to flash memory.  
Print a stored fax (when private receive feature is on)  
To print stored faxes, you must provide the private-receive PIN. Once the product prints the stored faxes,  
the faxes are deleted from memory.  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Receive, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Print faxes, and then press OK.  
4. Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the product security PIN, and then press OK.  
Reprint a fax  
If you want to reprint a fax because the print cartridge has reached its estimated end of life or if the fax  
was printed on the wrong type of media, you can try to reprint it. The amount of memory that is available  
determines the actual number of faxes that are stored for reprinting. The most recent fax prints first; the  
oldest fax that is in storage prints last.  
These faxes are stored continuously. Reprinting them does not clear them from the memory. To clear  
these faxes from the memory, see Delete faxes from memory on page 126.  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Receive, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Reprint faxes, and then press OK. The product begins reprinting  
the most recently printed fax.  
NOTE: To stop the printing at any time, press Cancel.  
136 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
     
CAUTION: If the Allow Fax Reprint setting is set to Off, misprinted or faded faxes cannot be reprinted.  
Receive faxes when fax tones are audible on the phone line  
If you have a telephone line that receives both fax and telephone calls, and you hear fax tones when  
you answer the telephone, you can start the receiving process in one of two ways:  
If you are close to the product, press Start Fax on the control panel and then hang up.  
When you answer any telephone connected to the line (an extension telephone) and hear fax tones,  
the product should begin answering the call automatically. If not, press 1-2-3 in sequence on the  
telephone keypad, listen for fax transmission sounds, and then hang up.  
NOTE: In order for the second method to work, the extension telephone setting must be set to Yes.  
ENWW  
Use fax 137  
 
Solve fax problems  
Fax error messages  
Alert and warning messages appear temporarily and might require the user to acknowledge the  
message by pressing OK to resume or by pressing Cancel to cancel the job. With certain warnings, the  
job might not complete or the print quality might be affected. If the alert or warning message is related  
to printing and the auto-continue feature is on, the product will attempt to resume the printing job after  
the warning has appeared for 10 seconds without acknowledgement.  
Alert and warning message tables  
Table 12-1 Alert and warning messages  
Control panel message  
Comm. error  
Description  
Recommended action  
A fax communication error occurred between Allow the product to retry sending the fax.  
the product and the sender or receiver.  
Perform a fax test to verify that the phone line  
works and is plugged into the correct port  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
Fax delayed – Send memory full  
Fax is busy Canceled send  
Fax memory is full.  
Cancel the fax by pressing OK or Cancel.  
Resend the fax. You might need to send the  
fax in multiple sections if the error occurs  
again.  
The fax line to which you were sending a fax Call the recipient to ensure that the fax  
was busy. The product has canceled sending machine is on and ready.  
the fax.  
Check that you are dialing the correct fax  
number.  
Check that the Redial if busy option is  
enabled.  
Perform a fax test to verify that the phone line  
works and is plugged into the correct port  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
Fax is busy Redial pending  
The fax line to which you were sending a fax Allow the product to retry sending the fax.  
was busy. The product automatically redials  
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax  
machine is on and ready.  
the busy number. See Set autoredial  
Check that you are dialing the correct fax  
number.  
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by  
pressing Start Fax.  
Perform a fax test to verify that the phone line  
works and is plugged into the correct port  
138 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
       
Table 12-1 Alert and warning messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
Fax memory full Canceling recv.  
During the fax transmission, the product ran Print all of the faxes, and then have the  
out of memory. Only the pages that fit into  
memory will be printed.  
sender resend the fax. Have the sender  
divide the fax job into multiple jobs before  
resending. Cancel all fax jobs or clear the  
faxes from memory. See Delete faxes from  
Fax memory full Canceling send  
During the fax job, the memory filled. All  
Print all received faxes or wait until all  
pages of the fax have to be in memory for a pending faxes are sent.  
fax job to work correctly. Only the pages that  
Ask the sender to send the fax again.  
fit into memory were sent.  
Cancel all fax jobs or clear the faxes from  
Fax recv. error  
An error occurred while trying to receive a fax. Ask the sender to resend the fax.  
Try faxing back to the sender or another fax  
machine.  
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by  
pressing Start Fax.  
Perform a fax test to verify that the phone line  
works and is plugged into the correct port  
Decrease the fax speed. See Change the fax  
speed on page 144. Ask the sender to  
resend the fax.  
Turn off error-correction mode. See Set the  
the sender to resend the fax.  
Connect the product to a different phone line.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
Fax Send error  
An error occurred while trying to send a fax. Try resending the fax.  
Try faxing to another fax number.  
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by  
pressing Start Fax.  
Perform a fax test to verify that the phone line  
works and is plugged into the correct port  
Set the fax resolution to Standard instead of  
the default of Fine. See Set resolution  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
ENWW  
Solve fax problems 139  
Table 12-1 Alert and warning messages (continued)  
Control panel message Description  
Recommended action  
Fax storage is full. Unable to answer call Memory is full  
Print out the private receive faxes or delayed  
faxes. Clear the product memory.  
Invalid entry  
No Dial Tone  
Invalid data or response.  
The product could not detect a dial tone.  
Correct the entry.  
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by  
pressing Start Fax.  
Perform a fax test to verify that the phone line  
works and is plugged into the correct port  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
No document sent  
The product did not scan any pages, or it did Try sending the fax again.  
not receive any pages from the computer to  
transmit a fax.  
No fax answer Redial pending  
The receiving fax line did not answer. The  
product attempts to redial after a few minutes.  
Allow the product to retry sending the fax.  
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax  
machine is on and ready.  
Check that you are dialing the correct fax  
number.  
Perform a fax test to verify that the phone line  
works and is plugged into the correct port  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
No fax answer. Canceled send  
Attempts to redial a fax number failed, or the Call the recipient to ensure that the fax  
“Redial-no answer” option was turned off.  
machine is on and ready.  
Check that you are dialing the correct fax  
number.  
Check that the redial option is enabled.  
Perform a fax test to verify that the phone line  
works and is plugged into the correct port  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
No fax detected  
The product answered the incoming call but Allow the product to retry receiving the fax.  
did not detect that a fax machine was calling.  
Perform a fax test to verify that the phone line  
works and is plugged into the correct port  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
140 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
Fax memory is retained when there is a loss of power  
The HP Color LaserJet CM1312 MFP Series flash memory protects against data loss when a power  
failure occurs. Flash memory can maintain its data for years without power applied.  
Fax logs and reports  
Use the following instructions to print fax logs and reports:  
Print all fax reports  
Use this procedure to print all of the following reports at one time:  
Fax activity log  
Phone book report  
Configuration report  
Usage page  
Junk-fax list  
Billing report (if the option is turned on)  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select All fax reports, and then press OK. The product exits the menu  
settings and prints the reports.  
Print individual fax reports  
Use the control panel to print the following fax logs and reports:  
Fax activity log: Provides a chronological history of the last 40 faxes that were received, sent, or  
deleted, and any errors that occurred.  
Phone book report: Lists the fax numbers that are assigned to the phone book entries, including  
speed dials and group-dial entries.  
Block-fax list: Lists the fax numbers that are blocked from sending faxes to the product.  
Last call report: Provides information about the last fax sent from or received at the product.  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select the report to be printed, and then press OK. The product exits the  
menu settings and prints the report.  
NOTE: If you selected Fax Activity log and pressed OK, press OK again to select Print log  
now. The product exits the menu settings and prints the log.  
ENWW  
Solve fax problems 141  
       
Set the fax activity log to print automatically  
You can decide whether or not you want the fax log to print automatically after every 40 entries. The  
factory-set default is On. Use the following steps to set the fax activity log to print automatically:  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax Activity log, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Auto Log Print, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select On, and then press OK to confirm the selection.  
Set the fax error report  
A fax error report is a brief report that indicates the product experienced a fax job error. It can be set to  
print after the following events:  
on Every error (the factory-set default)  
on Send error  
on Receive error  
Never  
NOTE: If you select Never, you will have no indication that a fax failed to be transmitted unless you  
print a fax activity log.  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax Error Report, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select the option for when you want the fax error reports to be printed.  
5. Press OK to save the selection.  
Set the fax confirmation report  
A confirmation report is a brief report that indicates the product successfully sent or received a fax job.  
It can be set to print after the following events:  
on Every fax  
on Send fax only  
on Receive fax only  
Never (the factory-set default)  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax Confirmation, and then press OK.  
142 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
 
4. Use the arrow buttons to select the option for when you want the fax error reports to be printed.  
5. Press OK to save the selection.  
Include the first page of each fax on the fax confirmation, fax error, and last call reports  
If this option is turned on and the page image still exists in the product memory, the fax configuration,  
fax error, and last call reports include a thumbnail (50% reduction) of the first page of the most recent  
fax that was sent or received. The factory-set default for this option is On.  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Include first page, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select On, and then press OK to confirm the selection.  
Perform a fax test  
The fax test checks for an working phone line and verifies that the phone cord is plugged into the correct  
port.  
To perform a fax test:  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Service, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax Service, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Run Fax Test, and then press OK.  
When the fax test completes, a report is printed from the device. The report contains one of three  
possible results:  
Pass: the report contains all of the current fax settings for review.  
Fail - the cord is in the wrong port: the report contains suggestions for how to resolve the issue.  
Fail - the phone line is not active: the report contains suggestions for how to resolve the issue.  
Change error correction and fax speed  
Set the fax-error-correction mode  
Usually, the product monitors the signals on the telephone line while it is sending or receiving a fax. If  
the product detects an error during the transmission and the error-correction setting is On, the product  
can request that the portion of the fax be resent. The factory-set default for error correction is On.  
You should turn off error correction only if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax, and you  
are willing to accept the errors in the transmission. Turning off the setting might be useful when you are  
trying to send a fax internationally or receive one, or if you are using a satellite telephone connection.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Service, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax Service, and then press OK.  
ENWW  
Solve fax problems 143  
       
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Error correction, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select On or Off, and then press OK to save the selection.  
Change the fax speed  
The fax-speed setting is the modem protocol that the product uses to send faxes. It is the worldwide  
standard for full-duplex modems that send and receive data across telephone lines at up to 33,600 bits  
per second (bps). The factory-set default for the fax-speed setting is High (V.34).  
You should change the setting only if you are having trouble sending a fax to or receiving a fax from a  
particular device. Decreasing the fax speed might be useful when you are trying to send a fax overseas,  
or receive one from overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone connection.  
1. On the control panel, press Fax Menu.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax Speed, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select a speed setting, and then press OK.  
Problems sending faxes  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
The document stops feeding in the  
middle of faxing.  
The maximum length of a page that you Print the document on shorter media.  
can load is 381 mm (15 inches). Faxing  
If no jam exists and less than one minute  
has elapsed, wait a moment before  
pressing Cancel. If a jam exists, remove  
the jam. Then, resend the job.  
of a longer page stops at 381 mm (15  
inches).  
If the item is too small, it can jam inside Use the flatbed scanner. The minimum  
the automatic document feeder (ADF).  
page size for the ADF is 127 x 127 mm  
(5 x 5 inches).  
If a jam exists, remove the jam. Then,  
resend the job.  
Faxes stop during sending.  
The receiving fax machine might be  
malfunctioning.  
Try sending to another fax machine.  
The telephone line might not be working. Do one of the following:  
Turn up the volume on the product,  
and then press Start Fax on the  
control panel. If you hear a dial tone,  
the telephone line is working.  
Perform a fax test to verify that the  
phone line works and is plugged  
into the correct port (see Perform a  
A communication error might be  
interrupting the fax job.  
Change the redial-on-communication-  
error setting to On.  
Fax is being sent on colored paper.  
Send the fax on white paper.  
144 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
           
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
The product is receiving faxes but is not If the product is on a digital system, the Disable the detect-dial-tone setting.  
sending them.  
system might be generating a dial tone  
that the product cannot detect.  
If the error persists, contact the system  
service provider.  
A poor telephone connection might exist. Try again later.  
The receiving fax machine might be  
malfunctioning.  
Try sending to another fax machine.  
The telephone line might not be working. Do one of the following:  
Turn up the volume on the product  
and press Start Fax on the control  
panel. If a dial tone exists, the  
telephone line is working.  
Perform a fax test to verify that the  
phone line works and is plugged  
into the correct port (see Perform a  
Outgoing fax calls continue to be dialed. The product automatically redials a fax  
To stop the product from redialing a fax,  
press Cancel. Or change the redial  
setting.  
number if the redial options are set to  
On.  
Sent faxes are not arriving at the  
receiving fax machine.  
The receiving fax machine might be off  
or might have an error condition, such as machine is on and ready to receive  
being out of paper. faxes.  
Call the recipient to verify that the fax  
The originals might be incorrectly loaded. Verify that the original documents are  
correctly loaded into the ADF input tray  
or flatbed scanner.  
A fax might be in memory because it is  
waiting to redial a busy number, other  
If a fax job is in memory for any of these  
reasons, an entry for the job appears in  
jobs that are ahead of it are waiting to be the fax log. Print the fax activity log and  
sent, or the fax is set up for a delayed  
send.  
check the Status column for jobs that  
show a Pending designation.  
Sent faxes include a block of gray  
shading at the end of each page.  
The glass-fax size might be set  
incorrectly.  
Verify that the setting is correct.  
Verify that the setting is correct.  
Try one of the following:  
Sent faxes have data missing from the  
end of each page.  
The glass-fax size might be set  
incorrectly.  
The control panel shows a low-memory The fax might be too large, or the  
error. resolution might be too high.  
Divide a large fax into smaller  
sections, and then fax them  
individually.  
Clear stored faxes to make more  
memory available for outgoing  
faxes.  
Configure the outgoing fax as a  
delayed fax, and then verify that it  
will send completely.  
Make sure that the product is using  
the lowest resolution setting  
(Standard).  
ENWW  
Solve fax problems 145  
 
Problems receiving faxes  
Use the table in this section to solve problems that might occur when receiving faxes.  
NOTE: Use the fax cord that came with the product in order to ensure that the product functions  
correctly.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
The product cannot receive faxes from  
an extension telephone.  
The extension-telephone setting might  
be disabled.  
Change the extension-telephone setting.  
The fax cord might not be securely  
connected.  
Verify that the fax cord is securely  
connected between the telephone jack  
and the product (or another device that is  
connected to the product). Wait until you  
hear fax tones, then press 1-2-3 in  
sequence, wait for three seconds and  
hang up.  
The product dialing mode might be  
incorrectly set, or the extension phone  
might be incorrectly set.  
Verify that the product dialing mode is set  
to Tone. Verify that the extension phone  
is set up for tone dialing as well.  
The product is not answering incoming  
fax calls.  
The answer mode might be set to  
Manual.  
If the answer mode is set to Manual, the  
product does not answer calls. Start the  
fax-receiving process manually.  
The rings-to-answer setting might not be Check the rings-to-answer setting to  
set correctly. verify that it is set properly.  
The answer-ring pattern feature might be Check the answer-ring pattern feature to  
turned on, but you do not have the  
service, or you do have the service and  
the feature is not set correctly.  
verify that it is set properly.  
The fax cord might not be correctly  
Perform a fax test to verify that the phone  
connected, or the fax cord is not working. line works and is plugged into the correct  
The product might not be able to detect Re-record the answering machine  
incoming fax tones because the  
answering machine is playing a voice  
message.  
message, leaving at least two seconds of  
silence at the beginning of the message.  
Too many devices might be connected to Do not attach more than three devices to  
the telephone line.  
the line. Remove the last device that was  
connected and determine whether the  
product works. If not, continue removing  
devices one at a time and retry after  
removing each one.  
The telephone line might not be working. Do one of the following:  
Increase the volume on the product,  
and then press Start Fax on the  
control panel. If a dial tone exists,  
the telephone line is working.  
Perform a fax test to verify that the  
phone line works and is plugged  
into the correct port (see Perform a  
146 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
 
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
The product is not answering incoming  
fax calls.  
A voice-messaging service might be  
interfering with the product as it attempts  
to answer calls.  
Do one of the following:  
Disable the messaging service.  
Get a telephone line that is  
dedicated to fax calls.  
Set the product answer mode to  
Manual. In manual mode, you must  
start the fax-receive process  
yourself.  
Leave the product set to automatic  
mode and lower the rings-to-  
answer setting for the product to a  
number less than the rings-to-  
answer setting for the voice mail.  
The product will answer all  
incoming calls.  
The product might be out of paper and  
the memory is full.  
Refill the media input tray. Press OK. The  
product prints all of the faxes it has saved  
in memory and then resumes answering  
fax calls.  
Faxes are not printing.  
The media input tray is empty.  
Load media. Any faxes that are received  
while the input tray is empty are stored in  
memory and will print after the tray has  
been refilled.  
The product has encountered an error.  
Check the control panel for an error  
message, and then see Fax error  
The sending fax number is on the junk  
faxes list.  
Check the junk faxes list and remove the  
number.  
The Private Receive feature is turned on. Turn off the Private Receive feature or  
access the saved faxes using the preset  
PIN.  
Faxes are printing on two pages instead The autoreduction setting might not be  
Turn on the autoreduction setting.  
of one.  
set correctly.  
The incoming faxes might have been  
sent on larger media.  
Adjust the autoreduction setting to allow  
larger pages to be printed on one page.  
Received faxes are too light, are blank, The product ran out of toner while  
The product stores the most recently  
printed faxes. (The amount of memory  
that is available determines the actual  
number of faxes stored for reprinting.) As  
soon as possible, replace the print  
cartridge, and then reprint the fax.  
or have poor print quality.  
printing a fax.  
The fax that was sent was too light.  
Contact the sender and have the sender  
resend the fax after altering the contrast  
settings.  
ENWW  
Solve fax problems 147  
Performance problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Faxes are transmitting or being received The fax might be very complex, such as Complex faxes take longer to be sent or  
very slowly.  
one with many graphics.  
received. Breaking longer faxes into  
multiple jobs and decreasing the  
resolution can increase the transmission  
speed.  
The receiving fax machine might have a The product sends the fax only at the  
slow modem speed.  
fastest modem speed that the receiving  
fax machine can accept.  
The resolution at which the fax was sent To receive the fax, call and ask the  
or is being received might be very high. sender to lower the resolution and  
resend the fax. To send the fax, lower the  
resolution and resend the fax.  
The telephone line might be  
experiencing line noise.  
Hang up and resend the fax. Have the  
telephone company check the telephone  
line.  
If the fax is being sent via a digital phone  
line, contact the service provider.  
The fax is being sent via an international Allow more time to transmit fax jobs  
call.  
internationally.  
The original document has a colored  
background.  
Reprint the original document with a  
white background, and then resend the  
fax.  
The fax activity logs or fax call reports are The fax activity log or fax call reports  
Print a configuration page and check  
when the reports print.  
printing at inappropriate times.  
settings are not correct.  
The product sounds are too loud or too  
soft.  
The volume setting might not be adjusted Adjust the product volume setting.  
correctly.  
148 Chapter 12 Fax (fax models only)  
ENWW  
     
13 Photo  
NOTE: This section applies only to the HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) product.  
ENWW  
149  
   
Insert a memory card  
The HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) product can read the following memory-card types:  
CompactFlash (CF) Type 1 and Type 2  
Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO, and Memory Stick Duo  
MultiMedia Card (MMC)  
Secure Digital (SD)  
xD Picture Card  
The HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) memory card reader recognizes only the .JPEG file  
format when printing from the product control panel. To print other file types, you must do one of the  
following:  
Use the software, such as PhotoSmart Premier software, provided on the product CD-ROM. See  
the software online Help for instructions.  
Windows operating system users: Use Windows Explorer to move other file types to your computer,  
and then print the files from the computer.  
Use the appropriate memory card slot on the HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) product. To  
find the appropriate slot, see the illustration below.  
3
1
2
4
1
2
3
4
Accepts xD memory cards.  
Accepts Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO, and Memory Stick Duo memory cards.  
Accepts CompactFlash memory cards.  
Accepts Secure Digital and MultiMedia memory cards.  
150 Chapter 13 Photo  
ENWW  
 
Insert and remove a memory card  
NOTE: The HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) recognizes memory cards up to 2 GB.  
1. Push the memory card into the appropriate memory slot to seat it.  
NOTE: You can use only one memory card in the product at a time. If two or more are inserted,  
the product displays an error message.  
2. The product reads the card, and then the product control panel displays X photos found on  
card, where X is the number of recognized .JPEG files found on the memory card.  
After a few seconds, the message Photo Menu appears on the control-panel display. Now you  
can use the HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) to print photos. See Print photos directly  
ENWW  
Insert a memory card 151  
3. Grasp the card and gently pull it straight out of the memory card slot to remove it.  
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the files stored on the card, do not remove a memory card while  
the product is accessing it. Wait for the LED near the memory card slots to stop blinking before  
you remove the memory card. When the LED remains illuminated, it is safe to remove the memory  
card.  
152 Chapter 13 Photo  
ENWW  
Change memory card default settings  
The HP LaserJet CM1312 (fax/photo-card model) product comes with default settings that you can  
change for photo printing from the product control panel.  
NOTE: The default settings remain as selected until you change and save them again. If you want to  
change the settings temporarily for a particular photo-printing job, see Print photos directly from the  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Photo setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select one of the following menu items, and then press OK.  
Default image Size: The default image size for photos.  
Default lighter/darker: Change the light and dark setting for the image that you are printing.  
Default number of copies: Change the number of copies that you want to print.  
Default output color: Set whether you are printing in color or black and white.  
Restore defaults: This returns all photo settings to the factory defaults.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to change the setting, and then press OK to save the change or, press X to  
exit the menu without saving changes.  
5. Repeat these steps for each menu item that you want to change.  
ENWW  
Change memory card default settings 153  
 
Print photos directly from the memory card  
Use the control panel to print directly from a memory card and to change the settings for a print job.  
Print individual photos from the memory card  
1. Insert the memory card into the product. The Photo Menu displays.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Easy Print and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Individual photo and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons or numeric keypad to make selections for each of the following menu items,  
and then press OK.  
Enter photo number: Select an individual photo to print. The photos are numbered, starting  
with number 1.  
Select image size: Set the size for the printed image.  
Select paper size: Select the media size.  
Select paper type: Select the media type.  
Number of copies: Set the number of copies to print (1 to 99).  
5. When the message [OK] to print appears on the control-panel display, press OK. Press X to exit  
the menu without printing.  
Print a range of photos from the memory card  
1. Insert the memory card into the product. The Photo Menu displays.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Easy Print, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select A range of photos, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons or numeric keypad to make selections for each of the following menu items,  
and then press OK.  
Select first photo: Select the first photo in the range of photos to print. The photos are  
numbered, starting with number 1.  
Select last photo: Select the last photo in the range of photos to print.  
Select image size: Set the size for the printed image.  
Select paper size: Select the media size.  
Select paper type: Select the media type.  
Number of copies: Set the number of copies to print (1 to 99).  
5. When the message [OK] to print appears on the control-panel display, press OK. Press X to exit  
the menu without printing.  
154 Chapter 13 Photo  
ENWW  
 
Print all of the photos from the memory card  
1. Insert the memory card into the product. The Photo Menu displays.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Easy Print, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select All photos (# - #), and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to make selections for each of the following menu items, and then press  
OK.  
Select image size: Set the size for the printed image.  
Select paper size: Select the media size.  
Select paper type: Select the media type.  
Number of copies: Set the number of copies to print (1 to 99).  
5. When the message [OK] to print appears on the control-panel display, press OK. Press X to exit  
the menu without printing.  
Print a memory card thumbnail sheet  
Use the control panel to print a thumbnail sheet of all of the photos on a memory card.  
1. Insert the memory card into the product. See Insert a memory card on page 150. The message  
Photo Menu displays.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Thumbnail and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select either Fast or Best, and then press OK. Press X to exit the menu  
without printing.  
ENWW  
Print a memory card thumbnail sheet 155  
   
Print and scan photos from a proof sheet  
Preview images and print photos from a proof sheet. A proof sheet can contain as many as 20 images.  
This feature has been optimized and tested for use with Genuine HP Toner Supplies.  
1. Insert the memory card into the product. The Photo Menu displays.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Options and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Proof Sheet and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Print proof sheet and then press OK.  
5. If more than 20 JPEG files exist on the memory card, use the arrow buttons to select one of the  
following menu items, then press OK.  
All photos (#-#): "#" represents the number of JPEG files the product detects on the card.  
Selecting this option prints all JPEG files on the memory card. Press OK again to confirm the  
print job.  
Last 20 photos: Prints the last 20 JPEG files from the alphabetized list on the memory card.  
Custom: Select one or more photos to print by pressing OK.  
6. After the proof sheet prints, color in the bubble beneath each picture you want to print using a dark  
blue or black pen. Also fill bubbles to indicate the image layout and media type.  
7. Place the proof sheet face-down on the flatbed scanner with the upper-left corner of the document  
at the corner indicated by the icon on the scanner.  
8. On the control panel, press Photo Menu.  
9. Use the arrow buttons to select Options and then press OK.  
10. Use the arrow buttons to select Proof Sheet and then press OK.  
11. Use the arrow buttons to select Scan proof sheet and then press OK. The product scans the proof  
sheet and prints the marked photos. Repeat steps 7 through 11 for each proof sheet.  
NOTE: Photos printed using a proofsheet can only be printed in color.  
JPEG files on the memory card are displayed in alphabetical order. When the order of photos on  
the memory card is unknown, print an index.  
Photos are still printed in color even when color copying is disabled on the product.  
156 Chapter 13 Photo  
ENWW  
 
14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
157  
 
Information pages  
Information pages reside within the product memory. These pages help diagnose and solve problems  
with the product.  
NOTE: If the product language was not correctly set during installation, you can set the language  
manually so the information pages print in one of the supported languages. Change the language by  
using the System setup menu on the control panel or the embedded Web server. See Control panel  
Page description  
How to print the page  
Configuration page  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
Shows the current settings and product properties.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press  
OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Configuration report,  
and then press OK.  
A second page also prints (fax models only). On that page, the  
Fax Settings section provides details about the product fax  
settings.  
Supplies status page  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
Shows the remaining life of the HP print cartridge, the  
approximate pages remaining, the number of pages printed,  
and other supplies information.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press  
OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Supplies Status, and  
then press OK.  
PCL, PCL 6, or PS font list  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
Shows which fonts are currently installed in the device.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press  
OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select PCL font list, PS font  
list, or PCL6 font list, and then press OK.  
Demo page  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
Contains examples of text and graphics.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press  
OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Demo page, and then  
press OK.  
Event log  
You can print the event log from HP ToolboxFX, the embedded  
Web server, or HP Web Jetadmin. See HP ToolboxFX  
Jetadmin Help.  
Usage page  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
Shows the number of one-sided (simplexed) or two-sided  
(duplexed) pages, and the average percentage of coverage.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press  
OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Usage page, and then  
press OK.  
158 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
           
Page description  
How to print the page  
Menu structure  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
Shows the control-panel menus.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press  
OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Menu structure, and then  
press OK.  
Network report  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
Shows the product network settings.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Reports, and then press  
OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Network report, and then  
press OK.  
Fax reports (fax models only)  
For information about fax logs and reports, see Fax logs and  
ENWW  
Information pages 159  
   
HP ToolboxFX  
HP ToolboxFX is a program that you can use to complete the following tasks:  
Check the product status.  
Configure the product settings.  
Configure pop-up-alert messages.  
View troubleshooting information.  
View online documentation.  
You can view HP ToolboxFX when the product is directly connected to your computer or is connected  
to the network. You must perform a recommended software installation to use HP ToolboxFX.  
NOTE: HP ToolboxFX is not supported for Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows XP (64-  
bit), or Macintosh operating systems. To use HP ToolboxFX, you must have TCP/IP protocol installed  
on your computer.  
You do not have to have Internet access to open and use HP ToolboxFX.  
View the HP ToolboxFX  
Open HP ToolboxFX in one of these ways:  
In the Windows system tray, double-click the HP ToolboxFX icon ( ).  
On the Windows Start menu, click Programs (or All Programs in Windows XP and Vista), click  
HP, click HP Color LaserJet CM1312 MFP Series, and then click HP ToolboxFX.  
Status  
The Status folder contains links to the following main pages:  
Device status. This page indicates product conditions such as a jam or an empty tray. After you  
correct a problem, click Refresh status to update the product status.  
Supplies status. View details such as the approximate percent of toner remaining in the print  
cartridge and the number of pages that have been printed with the current print cartridge. This page  
also has links for ordering supplies and for finding recycling information.  
Device configuration. View a detailed description of the current product configuration, including  
the amount of memory installed and whether optional trays are installed.  
Network summary. View a detailed description of the current network configuration, including the  
IP address and network status.  
Print info pages. Print the Configuration page and other information pages, such as the Supplies  
status page. See Information pages on page 158.  
Color usage job log. View color usage information for the product.  
Event log. View a history of product errors. The most recent error is listed first.  
160 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
       
Event log  
The event log is a four-column table where the product events are logged for your reference. The log  
contains codes that correspond to the error messages that appear on the product control-panel display.  
The number in the Page Count column specifies the total number of pages that the product had printed  
when the error occurred. The event log also contains a brief description of the error. For more information  
about error messages, see Control-panel messages on page 191.  
Alerts  
The HP ToolboxFX Alerts tab contains links to the following main pages:  
Set up Status Alerts . Set up the product to send you pop-up alerts for certain events, such as  
low toner levels.  
Set up E-mail Alerts. Set up the product to send you e-mail alert messages for certain events,  
such as low toner levels.  
Set up status alerts  
Use HP ToolboxFX to set up the product so that it issues pop-up alerts to your computer when certain  
events occur. Events that trigger alerts include jams, low levels of toner in HP print cartridges, non-HP  
print cartridge in use, empty input trays, and specific error messages.  
Select the pop-up format, the tray icon format, or both for the alerts. The pop-up alerts only appear when  
the product is printing from the computer on which you set up the alerts.  
Change the Cartridge low threshold setting, which sets the toner level that causes a low toner alert,  
on the System Settings page.  
NOTE: You must click Apply before the changes take effect.  
Set up e-mail alerts  
Use this to configure up to two e-mail addresses to receive alert messages when certain events occur.  
You can specify different events for each e-mail address. Use the information for the e-mail server that  
will send out the e-mail alert messages for the product.  
NOTE: You can only configure e-mail alerts to be sent from a server that does not require user  
authentication. If your e-mail server requires you to log in with a username and password, you cannot  
enable e-mail alerts.  
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.  
Product information  
The Product information folder contains links to the following page:  
Demonstration Pages. Print pages that show the color print quality potential and overall print  
characteristics of the product.  
ENWW  
HP ToolboxFX 161  
         
Fax  
Use the HP ToolboxFX Fax tab to perform fax tasks from your computer. The Fax tab contains links to  
the following main pages:  
Fax Receive. Set the fax receive mode.  
Fax Phone Book. Add, edit, or delete entries in the product phone book.  
Fax Send Log. View all of the recent faxes that have been sent from the product.  
Fax Receive Log. View all of the recent faxes that have been received by the product.  
Junk Faxes. Add, delete, or view fax numbers that are blocked.  
Fax Data Properties. Manage the space used to store faxes on your computer. These settings  
apply only if you have chosen to send or receive faxes remotely from your computer.  
Fax Receive  
The following options are available when receiving a fax:  
Print the fax. You can also select an option to have a message appear on your computer to notifying  
you when the fax was printed.  
Forward the fax to another fax machine.  
For more information about fax tasks, see Fax (fax models only) on page 105.  
NOTE: You must click Apply before the changes take effect.  
Fax phone book  
Use the HP ToolboxFX fax phone book to add and remove individuals or groups on your speed-dial list,  
import phone books from a variety of sources, and update and maintain the contact list.  
To add an individual contact to the speed-dial list, select the row of the speed dial number that you  
want to specify. Type the contact name in the Contact name window. Type the fax number in the  
Fax number window. Click Add.  
To add a group of contacts to the speed-dial list, select the row of the speed-dial number that you  
want to specify. Click Add Group. Double-click a contact name from the list on the left to move it  
to the group list on the right, or select a name on the left and then click the appropriate arrow to  
move it to the group list on the right. You can also use those two methods to move names from  
right to left. When you have created a group, type a name in the Group name window, and then  
click OK.  
To edit an existing individual speed-dial entry, click anywhere on the row containing the contact  
name to select it, and then click Update. Type changes in the appropriate windows, and then click  
OK.  
To edit an existing group-speed-dial entry, click anywhere on the row containing the group name  
to select it, and then click Update Group. Make any required changes, and then click OK.  
To delete an entry from the speed-dial list, select the item, and then click Delete.  
To move speed dial entries, select the entry and then click Move, or select Move and then specify  
the entry in the dialog box. Either select Next empty row or specify the number of the row where  
you want to move the entry.  
162 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
   
NOTE: If you specify a row that is occupied, the new entry will overwrite the existing entry.  
To import contacts from a phone book that exists in Lotus Notes, Outlook, or Outlook Express, click  
Import/Export Phone Book. Select the Import option, and then click Next. Select the appropriate  
software program, navigate to the appropriate file, and then click Finish. To export contacts from  
a phone book, click Import/Export Phone Book. Select the Export option, and then click Next.  
Enter the file name or browse to the file to which you want to export contacts, and then click  
Finish. You can also select individual entries from the phone book instead of importing the entire  
phone book.  
To delete all entries, click Delete All, and then click Yes.  
In addition to numerical digits, the following are valid characters for fax numbers:  
(
)
+
-
*
#
R
W
.
,
<space>  
NOTE: You must click Apply before the changes take effect.  
For more information about faxes, see Fax (fax models only) on page 105.  
ENWW  
HP ToolboxFX 163  
Fax send log  
The HP ToolboxFX fax send log lists all recently sent faxes and information about them, including the  
date and time sent, job number, fax number, page count, and the results.  
Click any column heading in the fax send log to re-sort the information in that column in ascending or  
descending order.  
The Results column provides the fax status. If the fax attempt was unsuccessful, this column provides  
a description of why the fax was not sent.  
For more information about faxes, see Fax (fax models only) on page 105.  
Fax receive log  
The HP ToolboxFX fax receive log provides a list of all recently received faxes and information about  
them including the date and time received, job number, fax number, page count, results, and an  
abbreviated fax image.  
The fax receive log can be used to block future faxes. Check the Block Fax box next to a received fax  
listed on the log.  
When a computer that is connected to the product receives a fax, the fax contains a View link. Clicking  
this link opens a new page that provides information about the fax.  
Click on any column heading in the fax receive log to re-sort the information in that column in ascending  
or descending order.  
The Results column provides the fax status. If the fax attempt was unsuccessful, this column provides  
a description of why the fax was not received.  
NOTE: You must click Apply before the changes take effect.  
For more information about faxes, see Fax (fax models only) on page 105.  
Junk Faxes  
Junk Faxes provides a list of all numbers that are blocked. Add, modify, or delete blocked fax numbers  
on this tab.  
Help  
The Help folder contains links to the following main pages:  
Troubleshooting. View troubleshooting help topics, print troubleshooting pages, clean the  
product, and open Microsoft Office Basic Colors. For more information about Microsoft Office Basic  
Colors, see Match colors on page 88.  
Paper and Print Media. Print information about how to obtain optimal results from your product  
using various types of paper and print media.  
Color Printing Tools. Open Microsoft Office Basic Colors or the full palette of color with associated  
RGB values. For more information about Microsoft Office Basic Colors, see Match colors  
on page 88. Use the HP Basic Color Match to adjust spot colors in your printed output.  
164 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
       
Animated demonstrations. View animated demonstrations for common troubleshooting  
procedures.  
User Guide. View information about the product usage, warranty, specifications, and support. The  
User Guide is available in both HTML and PDF format.  
ENWW  
HP ToolboxFX 165  
System Settings  
The HP ToolboxFX System Settings tab contains links to the following main pages:  
Device Information. View information about the product, such as the product description and a  
contact person.  
Paper Handling. Change the product paper-handling settings, such as default paper size and  
default paper type.  
Print Quality. Change the product print-quality settings.  
Print Density. Change the print-density settings, such as contrast, highlights, midtones, and  
shadows.  
Paper Types. Change the mode settings for each media type, such as letterhead, prepunched, or  
glossy paper.  
System Setup. Change the system settings, such as jam recovery and auto-continue. Change the  
Cartridge low threshold setting, which sets the toner level that causes a Low toner pop-up alert.  
Service. Gain access to various procedures required to maintain the product.  
Device Polling. Change the product polling settings, which determine how often HP ToolboxFX  
collects data from the product.  
Save/Restore Settings. Save the current settings for the product to a file on the computer. Use  
this file to load the same settings onto another product or to restore these settings to this product  
at a later time.  
Password. Set, change, or clear the product security password (see Turn on password protection  
Device Information  
The Device Information page stores data about your product for future reference. The information that  
you type in the fields on this page appears on the Configuration page. You can type any character in  
each of these fields.  
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.  
166 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
 
Paper Handling  
Use these options to configure your default settings. For more information, see Use the control-panel  
The following options are available for handling print jobs when the product is out of media:  
Select Wait for paper to be loaded.  
Select Cancel from the Paper out action drop-down list to cancel the print job.  
Select Override from the Paper out action drop-down list to send the print job to another paper  
tray.  
The Paper out time field specifies how long the product waits before acting on your selections. You  
can specify from 0 to 3600 seconds.  
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.  
Print Quality  
Use these options to improve the appearance of your print jobs. For more information, see Control panel  
Color Calibration  
Power On Calibration. Specify whether the product should calibrate when you turn it on.  
Calibration Timing. Specify how frequently the product should calibrate.  
Calibration Mode. Specify the type of calibration the product should use.  
Normal  
Full (slower)  
Full calibration improves the color accuracy of photos printed on 100 x 150 mm (4 x 6 in)  
HP Color Laser Photo Paper.  
Calibrate Now. Set the product to calibrate immediately.  
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.  
Print Density  
Use these settings to make fine adjustments in the amount of each color of toner that is used for your  
printed documents.  
Contrasts. Contrast is the range of difference between light (highlight) and dark (shadow) colors.  
To increase the overall range between light and dark colors, increase the Contrasts setting.  
Highlights. Highlights are colors that are nearly white. To darken highlight colors, increase the  
Highlights setting. This adjustment does not affect midtone or shadow colors.  
ENWW  
HP ToolboxFX 167  
       
Midtones. Midtones are colors that are halfway between white and solid density. To darken  
midtone colors, increase the Midtones setting. This adjustment does not affect highlight or shadow  
colors.  
Shadows. Shadows are colors that are nearly solid density. To darken shadow colors, increase  
the Shadows setting. This adjustment does not affect highlight or midtone colors.  
Paper Types  
Use these options to configure print modes that correspond to the various media types. To reset all  
modes to factory default settings, select Restore modes.  
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.  
168 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
 
System setup  
Use the HP ToolboxFX system settings options to configure global settings for copy, fax, scan, and print,  
such as jam recovery and auto-continue.  
NOTE: You must click Apply before the changes take effect.  
Service  
During the printing process, paper, toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the product. Over  
time, this buildup can cause print-quality problems such as toner specks or smearing. The HP ToolboxFX  
provides an easy method for cleaning the paper path. For more information, see Clean the product  
Device polling  
You can turn off HP ToolboxFX device polling to reduce network traffic, but doing so also disables some  
HP ToolboxFX features: pop-up alerts, fax log updates, the ability to receive faxes to this computer, and  
scanning using the Scan To button.  
NOTE: You must click Apply before the changes take effect.  
Print Settings  
The HP ToolboxFX Print Settings tab contains links to the following main pages:  
Printing. Change the default product print settings, such as number of copies and paper  
orientation.  
PCL5. View and change the PCL5 settings.  
PostScript. View and change the PS settings.  
Photo. Change the photo settings and enable/disable the photo card slots (photo card models  
only).  
Printing  
Use these options to configure the settings for all print functions. These are the same options that are  
available on the control panel. For more information, see Use the control-panel menus on page 10.  
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.  
ENWW  
HP ToolboxFX 169  
         
PCL5  
Use these options to configure the settings when you are using the PCL print personality.  
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.  
PostScript  
Use this option when you are using the PostScript print personality. When the Print PostScript error  
option is turned on, the PostScript error page automatically prints when PostScript errors occur.  
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.  
Network Settings  
The network administrator can use this tab to control the network-related settings for the product when  
it is connected to an IP-based network.  
170 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
       
Embedded Web server  
This product is equipped with an embedded Web server (EWS), which provides access to information  
about product and network activities. A Web server provides an environment in which web programs  
may run, much in the same way that an operating system, such as Windows, provides an environment  
for programs to run on a computer. The output from these programs can then be displayed by a Web  
browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, Safari, or Netscape Navigator.  
An “embedded” Web server resides on a hardware device (such as an HP LaserJet product) or in  
firmware, rather than as software that is loaded on a network server.  
The advantage of an EWS is that it provides an interface to the product that anyone with a network-  
connected product and computer can use. There is no special software to install or configure, but you  
must have a supported Web browser on the computer. To gain access to the EWS, type the IP address  
for the product in the address line of the browser. (To find the IP address, print a configuration page.  
For more information about printing a configuration page, see Information pages on page 158.)  
NOTE: For Macintosh operating systems, you can use the EWS over a USB connection after installing  
the Macintosh software included with the product.  
Features  
The EWS allows you to view product and network status and manage printing functions from a computer.  
With the EWS, you can complete the following tasks:  
View product status information  
Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones  
View and change part of the product configuration  
View and print some internal pages  
Select the language in which to display the EWS pages and control panel messages  
View and change network configuration  
Set, change, or clear the product security password (see Turn on password protection from the  
Enable/disable the photo card slot on the product from the print tab  
NOTE: Changing network settings in the EWS might disable some of product software or features.  
ENWW  
Embedded Web server 171  
   
Use HP Web Jetadmin software  
HP Web Jetadmin is a Web-based software solution for remotely installing, monitoring, and  
troubleshooting network-connected peripherals. The intuitive browser interface simplifies cross-platform  
management of a wide range of devices, including HP and non-HP devices. Management is proactive,  
allowing network administrators the ability to resolve issues before users are affected. Download this  
free, enhanced-management software at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_software.  
To obtain plug-ins to HP Web Jetadmin, click plug-ins, and then click the download link that is next to  
the name of the plug-in that you want. The HP Web Jetadmin software can automatically notify you  
when new plug-ins are available. On the Product Update page, follow the directions to automatically  
connect to the HP Web site.  
If installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin is available to any client through a supported Web  
browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows or Netscape Navigator 7.1 for Linux.  
Browse to the HP Web Jetadmin host.  
NOTE: Browsers must be Java-enabled. Browsing from an Apple PC is not supported.  
Security features  
The product includes a password feature that restricts access to setup features while allowing basic  
functions to continue. The password can be set from the EWS or the control panel.  
Private receive can be used to store faxes on the product until you are at the product to print them.  
Turn on password protection using the embedded Web server  
Use the EWS to set the password.  
1. Open the EWS, and then click the System tab.  
2. Click Password.  
3. In the Password box, type the password you want to set, and then in the Confirm password box,  
type the same password again to confirm your choice.  
4. Click Apply to save the password.  
Turn on password protection from the control panel  
To set up the product security password, complete the following steps:  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select System setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Product security, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select On, and then press OK.  
5. Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the product password, and then press OK.  
6. To confirm the product password, use the alphanumeric buttons to re-enter the password, and then  
press OK.  
172 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
           
Turn on private receive feature  
The password-protection feature must be turned on before the private-receive feature can be activated.  
1. On the control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to select Fax setup, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to select Advanced setup, and then press OK.  
4. Use the arrow buttons to select Private receive, and then press OK.  
5. Use the arrow buttons to select On, and then press OK.  
6. Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the product security password, and then press OK.  
7. To confirm the product security password, use the alphanumeric buttons to re-enter the product  
security password, and then press OK.  
ENWW  
Security features 173  
 
Manage supplies  
Check and order supplies  
You can check the supplies status by using the product control panel, printing a supplies status page,  
or viewing HP ToolboxFX. Hewlett-Packard recommends that you place an order for a replacement print  
cartridge when Low message for a print cartridge first appears. Use a new, authentic HP print cartridge  
to obtain the following types of supplies information:  
Amount of cartridge life remaining  
Approximate number of pages remaining  
Number of pages printed  
Other supplies information  
NOTE: If the product is connected to the network, you can set HP ToolboxFX to notify you by e-mail  
when a print cartridge is low. If the product is directly connected to a computer, you can set  
HP ToolboxFX to notify you when supplies are low.  
Check supplies status by using the control panel  
Do one of the following:  
Check the product control panel, which indicates when a print cartridge is low or has reached its  
estimated end of life. The control panel also indicates when a non-HP print cartridge is first installed.  
Print a supplies status page, and then check the supplies levels on the page.  
If the supplies levels are low, you can order supplies through a local HP dealer, by telephone, or online.  
online.  
Check supplies status by using HP ToolboxFX  
You can configure HP ToolboxFX to notify you when the supplies are low. Choose to receive alerts by  
e-mail or as a pop-up message or taskbar icon.  
174 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
         
Store supplies  
Follow these guidelines for storing print cartridges:  
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.  
CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not expose the print cartridge to light for more than a few  
minutes.  
See Environmental specifications on page 239 for operating and storage temperature ranges.  
Store the supply in a horizontal position.  
Store the supply in a dark, dry location away from heat and magnetic sources.  
HP policy on non-HP supplies  
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP supplies, either new or  
remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their  
quality. Service or repairs required as a result of using a non-HP supply will not be covered under the  
warranty.  
HP fraud hotline  
Call the HP fraud hotline if the product or HP ToolboxFX indicates that the print cartridge is not an  
HP print cartridge and you think that it is genuine. HP will help determine if the product is genuine and  
take steps to resolve the problem.  
The print cartridge might not be a genuine HP one if you notice the following issues:  
You are experiencing a large number of problems with the print cartridge.  
The print cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the pull tab or the box is different).  
In the United States, call toll-free: 1-877-219-3183.  
Outside the United States, you can call collect. Dial the operator and ask to place a collect call to this  
telephone number: 1-770-263-4745. If you do not speak English, a representative at the HP fraud hotline  
who speaks your language will assist you. Or, if someone who speaks your language is not available,  
a language line interpreter will connect approximately one minute after the beginning of the call. The  
language line interpreter is a service that will translate between you and the representative for the HP  
fraud hotline.  
Recycle supplies  
To install a new HP print cartridge, follow the instructions that are included in the box that contains the  
new supply, or see the getting started guide.  
To recycle supplies, place the used supply in the box in which the new supply arrived. Use the enclosed  
return label to send the used supply to HP for recycling. For complete information, see the recycling  
guide that is included with each new HP supply item. See HP LaserJet print supplies on page 243 for  
more information about HP's recycling program.  
ENWW  
Manage supplies 175  
     
Replace supplies  
Print cartridge  
1
2
3
Cartridge E-label  
Plastic shield  
Imaging Drum. Do not touch the imaging drum on the bottom of the print cartridge. Fingerprints on the imaging drum can  
cause print-quality problems.  
1. Open the front door.  
176 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
     
2. Pull out the print-cartridge drawer.  
3. Grasp the handle on the old print cartridge and then pull the cartridge straight up to remove it.  
4. Remove the new print cartridge from the packaging.  
ENWW  
Manage supplies 177  
5. Remove the orange, plastic shield from the bottom of the new print cartridge.  
CAUTION: Do not touch the imaging drum on the bottom of the print cartridge. Fingerprints on  
the imaging drum can cause print-quality problems.  
6. Insert the new print cartridge into the product.  
7. Pull the tab on the left side of the print cartridge straight up to completely remove the sealing tape.  
Discard the sealing tape.  
178 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
8. Close the print-cartridge drawer.  
9. Close the front door.  
10. Place the old print cartridge in the box for the new print cartridge. Follow the recycling instructions  
that are included in the box.  
CAUTION: If toner gets on any clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothing in cold water.  
Hot water sets toner into the fabric.  
Clean the product  
Clean the paper path  
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the product. Over  
time, this buildup can cause print-quality problems such as toner specks or smearing. This product has  
a cleaning mode that can correct and prevent these types of problems.  
Specks  
Smearing  
ENWW  
Manage supplies 179  
     
Clean the paper path from HP ToolboxFX  
Use HP ToolboxFX to clean the paper path. This is the recommended cleaning method. If you do not  
have access to HP ToolboxFX, use the method in Clean the paper path from the product control panel  
1. Make sure that the product is turned on and in the Ready state, and that media is loaded in tray 1  
or tray 2.  
2. Open HP ToolboxFX, click the product, and then click the System Settings tab.  
3. Click the Service tab, and then click Start.  
A page feeds through the product slowly. Discard the page when the process is completed.  
Clean the paper path from the product control panel  
If you do not have access to HP ToolboxFX, you can print and use a cleaning page from the product  
control panel.  
1. Press Setup.  
2. Use the arrow buttons to find the Service menu, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrow buttons to find Cleaning mode, and then press OK.  
4. Load plain letter or A4 paper when you are prompted.  
5. Press OK again to confirm and begin the cleaning process.  
A page feeds through the product slowly. Discard the page when the process is completed.  
180 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
 
Clean the automatic document feeder (ADF) pickup roller assembly  
If the ADF has trouble feeding documents, clean the ADF pickup roller assembly.  
1. Turn off the product and unplug the power cord.  
2. Open the ADF cover.  
ENWW  
Manage supplies 181  
 
3. Rotate the assembly upward. Wipe it clean and rotate the rollers until the assembly is clean.  
4. Lower the green lever assembly and close the ADF cover.  
NOTE: If you are experiencing jams in the ADF, contact HP. See www.hp.com/support/  
CM1312series or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
182 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
5. Plug in the product, and then turn on the product.  
Clean the lid backing  
Minor debris can accumulate on the white document lid backing that is located underneath the product  
lid.  
1. Turn off the product, unplug the power cord, and raise the lid.  
2. Clean the white document lid backing by using a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with  
a mild soap and warm water. Wash the backing gently to loosen debris; do not scrub the backing.  
3. Also, clean the scanner strip next to the ADF scanner glass.  
4. Dry the backing by using a chamois or soft cloth.  
ENWW  
Manage supplies 183  
   
CAUTION: Do not use paper-based wipes because they might scratch the backing.  
5. If this does not clean the backing well enough, repeat the previous steps and use isopropyl alcohol  
to dampen the cloth or sponge, and then wipe the backing thoroughly with a damp cloth to remove  
any residual alcohol.  
Clean the scanner glass  
Dirty glass, from fingerprints, smudges, hair, and so on, slows down performance and affects the  
accuracy of special features such as fit-to-page and copy.  
NOTE: If streaks or other defects appear only on copies produced using the automatic document  
feeder (ADF), clean the scanner strip (step 3). It is not necessary to clean the scanner glass.  
1. Turn off the product, unplug the power cord from the electrical socket, and raise the lid.  
2. Clean the glass by using a soft, lint-free cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive  
glass cleaner.  
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon  
tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can damage the product. Do not place liquids directly  
on the glass. They might seep under it and damage the product.  
In certain areas of California, air pollution control regulations restrict the use of liquid Isopropyl  
NOTE:  
Alcohol (IPA) as a cleaning agent. In those areas of California, please disregard the previous  
recommendations and use a dry, lint-free cloth. The cloth may be moistened with water if desired.  
184 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
   
3. Clean the scanner strip (ADF models only) by using a soft, lint-free cloth or sponge that has been  
moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner..  
4. To prevent spotting, dry the glass by using a chamois or cellulose sponge.  
Clean the exterior  
Use a soft, damp, lint-free cloth to wipe dust, smudges, and stains off of the exterior of the product.  
Firmware updates  
Firmware updates and installation instructions for this product are available at www.hp.com/support/  
CM1312series. Click Downloads and drivers, click the operating system, and then select the firmware  
download for the product.  
ENWW  
Manage supplies 185  
         
186 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
Problem-solving checklist  
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the product.  
Step  
number  
Verification step  
Is the power on?  
Possible problems  
Solutions  
1
No power due to failed power source, cable, 1. Verify that the product is plugged in.  
switch, or fuse.  
2. Verify that the power cable is functional  
and that the power switch is on.  
3. Check the power source by plugging  
the product directly into the wall or into  
a different outlet.  
Print engine motor does not rotate.  
1. Verify that the print cartridges are  
properly installed. Look at the control-  
panel messages and follow the  
instructions to remove and replace the  
cartridges.  
2. Verify that the top cover is closed  
ADF motor does not rotate.  
1. Open the ADF cover and remove any  
orange shipping tape inside the ADF.  
2. Verify that the ADF cable is connected  
correctly to the scanner.  
3. If the ADF motor still does not rotate,  
replace the ADF.  
Scanner bulb does not light.  
Control panel shows an error.  
If the scanner bulb does not light, contact  
HP Support.  
2
3
Does Ready appear in the  
product control panel?  
for a list of common messages that will help  
you correct the error.  
The control panel should  
function without error  
messages.  
Do information pages print? An error message appears on the control-  
for a list of common messages that will help  
you correct the error.  
panel display.  
Print a configuration page. See  
Paper jams when printing.  
Make sure that media that meets  
HP specifications. See Paper and print  
Clean the paper path. See Clean the paper  
188 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
 
Step  
Verification step  
Possible problems  
Solutions  
number  
4
Does the product copy?  
Poor copy quality from the ADF.  
If the print quality from the internal tests and  
the copy from the flatbed were acceptable,  
Place the configuration page  
into the ADF and make a copy.  
The report should feed  
smoothly through the ADF, and  
copies should print without  
print-quality problems. Make a  
copy from the flatbed as well.  
The ADF is damaged. Replace the ADF.  
Paper jams when printing.  
Make sure that media that meets  
HP specifications. See Paper and print  
Clean the paper path. See Clean the paper  
Poor copy quality from the flatbed.  
1. If the print quality from the internal tests  
and the copy from the ADF were  
acceptable, clean the flatbed glass.  
2. If, after performing the maintenance,  
the problem persists, see Copy  
Media does not move smoothly through the 1. Clean the ADF pick roller and the ADF  
ADF path.  
separation pad. See Clean the  
2. If the problem persists, replace the  
ADF pick roller.  
3. If the problem persists, replace the  
ADF.  
5
6
Does the product send a fax? The telephone line is not operational or the  
Perform a fax test to verify that the phone  
product is not plugged into the telephone line. line works and is plugged into the correct  
Press Start Fax to verify that a  
dial tone exists (using a hand  
set, if necessary). Attempt to  
send a fax.  
Does the product receive a  
fax?  
Too many telephone devices are plugged in, Make sure that the HP Color LaserJet  
or telephone devices are not connected in the CM1312 MFP Series is the only device on  
correct order.  
the telephone line and try again to receive  
the fax.  
Use another fax machine to  
send a fax to the product, if  
available.  
The product fax settings are set incorrectly.  
The Private Receive feature is turned on.  
Review and reset the product fax settings.  
Turn Private Receive off or use the preset  
PIN to access and print the faxes.  
ENWW  
Problem-solving checklist 189  
Step  
Verification step  
Possible problems  
Solutions  
number  
7
Does the product print from Software is not installed correctly or an error Uninstall and then reinstall the product  
the computer?  
occurred during software installation.  
software. Verify that you are using the  
correct installation procedure and the  
correct port setting.  
Use a word-processing  
program to send a print job to  
the product.  
The cable is not connected correctly.  
An incorrect driver is selected.  
Reconnect the cable.  
Select the proper driver.  
There is a port driver problem in Microsoft  
Windows.  
Uninstall and then reinstall the product  
software. Verify that you are using the  
correct installation procedure and the  
correct port setting.  
8
Does the product scan to the The cable is not connected correctly.  
Reconnect the cable.  
computer?  
Software is not installed correctly or an error Uninstall and then reinstall the product  
occurred during software installation.  
software. Verify that you are using the  
correct installation procedure and the  
correct port setting.  
Initiate a scan from the basic  
desktop software at your  
computer.  
If the error persists, turn off the product and then turn on the product.  
The device does not recognize the card. 1. Remove the card and reinsert it into the  
9
Does the device recognize  
and print from a memory  
card?  
slot. Verify that the card is fully inserted  
into the slot.  
Insert a memory card and print  
an index page. See Print a  
2. Verify that the memory-card type is a  
supported type.  
3. Verify that only one card is inserted in  
the memory card slots.  
The device does not print certain images.  
Verify that the files on the memory card are  
in the correct format. The device recognizes  
only SRGB format .JPEG files.  
Restore the factory-set defaults  
Restoring the factory-set defaults returns all of the settings to the factory defaults, and it also clears the  
fax header name, phone number, speed dials, and any stored faxes in the product memory.  
CAUTION: This procedure also clears all fax numbers and names that are associated with one-touch  
keys and speed-dial codes, and deletes any pages that are stored in the memory. The procedure then  
automatically restarts the product.  
1. On the product control panel, press Setup.  
2. Use the arrows buttons to select Service, and then press OK.  
3. Use the arrows buttons to select Restore defaults, and then press OK.  
The product automatically restarts.  
190 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
 
Control-panel messages  
The majority of the control-panel messages are intended to guide the user through typical operation.  
The control-panel messages indicate the status of the current operation, and include a page count if  
appropriate. When the product is receiving fax data, print data, or scanning commands, control-panel  
messages indicate this status. In addition, alert messages, warning messages, and critical error  
messages indicate situations that might require some action.  
To solve fax issues, see Solve fax problems on page 138.  
Table 15-1 Control-panel messages  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
10.000X Supply Memory Error  
A specific print cartridge has an e-label error. Remove and reinstall the print cartridge.  
"X" indicates the cartridge: 0=black, 1=cyan, Turn off and then turn on the product.  
2=magenta, 3=yellow.  
If the problem is not solved, replace the  
cartridge.  
10.100X Supply Memory Error  
A specific print cartridge has a faulty or  
missing e-label.  
Check the e-label. If it is broken or damaged,  
replace the cartridge.  
"X" indicates the cartridge: 0=black, 1=cyan, Verify that the cartridge is installed in the  
2=magenta, 3=yellow.  
correct location.  
Reinstall the print cartridge.  
Turn off and then turn on the product.  
If the error is with a color cartridge, try  
swapping it with a different color cartridge in  
the tray. If the same message appears, then  
there is an engine problem. If a different  
10.100X message appears, replace the  
cartridge.  
If the problem is not solved, replace the  
cartridge.  
49 Error, Turn off then on  
The product has experienced an internal  
embedded software error. Under most  
conditions, the product will power cycle  
automatically.  
Turn off the power by using the power switch,  
wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the  
power and wait for the product to initialize.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
50.x Fuser Error  
The product has experienced an internal  
hardware error.  
1. Turn off the power by using the power  
switch, and then wait at least 30  
seconds.  
2. If a surge protector is being used,  
remove it. Plug the product directly into  
the wall socket.  
3. Turn on the power and wait for the  
product to initialize.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
ENWW  
Control-panel messages 191  
   
Table 15-1 Control-panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
52 Scanner Error  
Description  
Recommended action  
The product has experienced an internal  
hardware error.  
Turn off the power by using the power switch,  
wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the  
power and wait for the product to initialize.  
If a surge protector is being used, remove it.  
Plug the product directly into the wall socket.  
Use the power switch to turn the product on.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
57 Fan Error, Turn off then on  
The product has experienced a problem with Turn off the power by using the power switch,  
its internal fan.  
wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the  
power and wait for the product to initialize.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
79 Error Turn off then on  
The product has experienced an internal  
firmware error. Under most conditions, the  
product will power cycle automatically.  
Turn off the power by using the power switch,  
wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the  
power and wait for the product to initialize.  
If a surge protector is being used, remove it.  
Plug the product directly into the wall socket.  
Use the power switch to turn the product on.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
ADF door is open  
The ADF lid is open or a sensor is  
malfunctioning.  
Make sure that the ADF lid is closed.  
Remove the ADF and reinstall it.  
If the message persists, turn off the power by  
using the power switch, wait at least 30  
seconds, and then turn on the power and wait  
for the product to initialize.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
Canceled copy. Clear document  
The Cancel button was pressed while  
scanning, faxing, or copying to cancel the  
Remove the jammed item. See Clear jams  
current job while pages were feeding from the on page 196. Then, clear the items in the  
ADF. The cancel process does not  
automatically clear the ADF.  
ADF tray and start over.  
Canceled scan. Clear document  
Canceled send. Clear document  
Comm. error [Receiver CSID]  
The Cancel button was pressed to cancel the Remove the jammed item. See Clear jams  
current job while pages were feeding from the from the ADF (photo card models only)  
ADF. The cancel process does not  
automatically clear the ADF.  
on page 196. Then, clear the items in the  
ADF tray and start over.  
The Cancel button was pressed to cancel the Remove the jammed item. See Clear jams  
current job while pages were feeding from the from the ADF (photo card models only)  
ADF tray. The cancel process does not  
automatically clear the ADF.  
on page 196. Then, clear the items in the  
ADF tray and start over.  
A fax communication error occurred between Allow the product to retry sending the fax.  
the product and the receiver.  
Unplug the product telephone cord from the  
wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a  
192 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Table 15-1 Control-panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
call. Plug the product phone cord into a jack  
for another phone line.  
Try a different phone cord.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
Comm. error [Sender CSID]  
A fax communication error occurred between Allow the product to retry sending the fax.  
the product and the sender.  
Unplug the product telephone cord from the  
wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a  
call. Plug the product phone cord into a jack  
for another phone line.  
Try a different phone cord.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
Device error, press OK  
Generic engine error.  
This is a warning message only. Job output  
might be affected.  
Device is busy. Try again later  
Doc feeder jam  
The product is currently in use.  
Wait for the product to finish the current job.  
Clear the jam.  
ADF has not been cleared since previous  
jam.  
Doc feeder jam Clear, Reload  
A piece of media is jammed in the ADF tray. Open the document release door, clear the  
jam, close the document release door, and  
reload the paper into the ADF tray.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
Document feeder mispick. Reload  
Media in the ADF tray was not picked up.  
Remove the media from the ADF tray, and  
then reload it.  
Clean the ADF pickup roller. See Clean the  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
Door open  
The print-cartridge door is open.  
Close the print-cartridge door.  
Engine Comm. Error  
The product has experienced an engine  
communication timeout error.  
Turn off the power by using the power switch,  
wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the  
power and wait for the product to initialize.  
If a surge protector is being used, remove it.  
Plug the product directly into the wall socket.  
Use the power switch to turn the product on.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
Engine error, press OK  
The product experienced a print engine error. This is a warning message only. Job output  
might be affected.  
ENWW  
Control-panel messages 193  
Table 15-1 Control-panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Description  
Recommended action  
Fit to Page on flatbed only  
The copy reduce/enlarge feature (called "Fit Use the flatbed or select another reduction/  
to Page") applies only to copies made from  
the flatbed scanner.  
enlargement setting.  
Install [color] cartridge  
Invalid driver Press OK  
One of the color cartridges is not installed with Install the indicated color cartridge.  
the door closed.  
You are using the incorrect printer driver.  
Select the printer driver that is appropriate for  
your product.  
Invalid entry  
Invalid data or response.  
Correct the entry.  
Jam in (area), Open door and clear jam  
There is a paper jam in the print paper path Clear the jam from the area indicated on the  
or output bin.  
product control panel, and then follow the  
control panel instructions. See Clear jams  
Jam in Tray 1, Clear jam and then press  
OK  
The product has detected a jam in tray 1.  
Out of paper in all available trays.  
Clear the jam from tray 1, and then follow the  
control panel instructions. See Clear jams  
Load paper  
Load paper in trays.  
Load Tray 1 <TYPE> <SIZE>, Press OK to Device is processing a job, but no trays  
Load paper in the correct orientation.  
Press OK to use existing tray settings.  
use available media  
match.  
Load Tray 1, <PLAIN> <SIZE> / Cleaning  
mode, OK to start  
Cleaning mode paper prompt.  
Load a clean sheet of paper in the correct  
orientation, then press OK to begin the  
cleaning procedures.  
Manual Duplex Load Tray 1, Press OK  
Manual duplex mode.  
Load paper in the correct orientation.  
Load paper into tray 1.  
Manual feed <SIZE> <TYPE>, Press OK to Print Manual Feed mode.  
use available media  
Memory is low Try again later  
The product does not have enough memory Wait until the current job is finished before  
to start a new job.  
starting a new job.  
Turn the product off and then on to clear the  
memory.  
Memory is low. Press OK  
The product memory has been almost  
completely filled.  
Press Cancel to clear the error.  
Break the job into smaller jobs that contain  
fewer pages.  
Turn the product off and then on to clear the  
memory.  
Memory low Only 1 copy made. Press OK The product does not have enough memory Break the job into smaller jobs that contain  
to continue.  
to complete the collated copy job.  
fewer pages.  
Turn the product off and then on to clear the  
memory.  
Misprint, Press OK  
Feed delay misprint.  
Verify that paper is loaded in the input tray.  
Reload paper.  
Non-HP supply Installed  
A new supply has been installed that is not  
made by HP. This message is appears for  
several seconds, and then the product  
returns to the Ready state.  
If you believe you purchased an HP supply,  
please call the HP fraud hotline at  
1-877-219-3183. Service or repairs that are  
required as a result of using non-HP supplies  
is not covered under HP warranty.  
194 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
 
Table 15-1 Control-panel messages (continued)  
Control panel message  
Order [color] cartridge.  
Description  
Recommended action  
A color print cartridge is low.  
Order the indicated color print cartridge.  
Print failure, press OK. If error repeats,  
turn off then on.  
The product could not print the current page Press OK to clear the message.  
because of its complexity.  
Allow the product to finish the job, or press  
Cancel to cancel the job.  
Scanner error #, Turn off then on  
The product has experienced an error in the Turn off the power by using the power switch,  
scanner sub-assembly area.  
wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the  
power and wait for the product to initialize.  
If a surge protector is being used, remove it.  
Plug the product directly into the wall socket.  
Use the power switch to turn the product on.  
If the error persists, contact HP. See  
support flyer that came in the product box.  
Scanner reserved for PC scan  
Scanning error Cannot connect  
Settings cleared  
A computer is using the product to create a  
scan.  
Wait until the computer scan has finished, or  
cancel the scan from the computer software,  
or press Cancel.  
The product cannot transmit scan information Verify that the connection cable is not loose  
to a computer.  
or damaged. Replace the cable if necessary,  
and try the scan again.  
The product has cleared job settings.  
Re-enter any appropriate job settings.  
Press OK to return to the Ready state.  
Used [color] installed, to accept press OK A used color printer cartridge has been  
installed or moved.  
Clear jams  
Causes of jams  
Occasionally, paper or other print media can become jammed during a print job. Some causes include  
the following events:  
The input trays are loaded improperly or overfilled, or the media guides are not set properly.  
Media is added to or removed from an input tray during a print job or an input tray is removed from  
the product during a print job.  
The cartridge door is opened during a print job.  
Too many sheets have accumulated in an output area, or sheets are blocking an output area.  
The print media that is being used does not meet HP specifications. See Paper and print media  
The media is damaged or has foreign objects attached to it, such as staples or paper clips.  
The environment in which the print media was stored is too humid or too dry. See Paper and print  
The shipping tape has not been removed from one or more paper path areas.  
ENWW  
Clear jams 195  
     
Where to look for jams  
Jams can occur in these locations:  
In the automatic document feeder (ADF models only)  
In input areas  
In output areas  
Inside the product paper path  
Find and remove the jam by using the instructions on the following pages. If the location of the jam is  
not obvious, first look inside the product.  
Loose toner might remain in the product after a jam. This problem typically resolves itself after a few  
sheets have been printed.  
Clear jams from the ADF (photo card models only)  
Occasionally, media becomes jammed during a fax, copy, or scan job.  
You are notified of a media jam by the Doc feeder jam Clear, Reload message that appears on the  
product control-panel display.  
The ADF input tray is loaded incorrectly or is too full. See Load paper and print media  
on page 58 for more information.  
The media does not meet HP specifications, such as those for size or type. See Paper and print  
media on page 53 for more information.  
1. Open the ADF cover.  
196 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
     
2. Lifting the green lever, rotate the pick mechanism until it stays open.  
3. Gently try to remove the page without tearing it. If you feel resistance, go to the next step.  
4. Open the ADF lid and gently loosen the media by using both hands.  
ENWW  
Clear jams 197  
5. When the media is free, gently pull it out in the direction shown.  
6. Close the lid to the flatbed scanner.  
7. Lower the green lever.  
198 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
8. Close the ADF lid.  
Clear jams from the input-tray areas  
CAUTION: Do not use sharp objects, such as tweezers or needle-nose pliers, to remove jams.  
Damage caused by sharp objects will not be covered by the warranty.  
When removing jammed media, pull the jammed media straight away from the product. Pulling jammed  
media out of the product at an angle can damage the product.  
NOTE: Depending on where the jam is located, some of the following steps might not be necessary.  
1. Open the rear output door.  
2. With both hands, grasp the side of the media that is most visible (this includes the middle), and  
carefully pull it free from the product.  
ENWW  
Clear jams 199  
   
3. Remove tray 1, and lift the jam access door.  
4. With both hands, grasp the side of the media that is most visible (this includes the middle), and  
carefully pull it free from the product.  
5. Reinsert tray 1.  
6. Close the rear output door.  
Clear jams from the output-bin  
CAUTION: Do not use sharp objects, such as tweezers or needle-nose pliers, to remove jams.  
Damage caused by sharp objects will not be covered by the warranty.  
With both hands, grasp the side of the media that is most visible (this includes the middle), and carefully  
pull it free from the product.  
200 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
   
Avoid repeated jams  
Verify that the input tray is not overfilled. The input tray capacity varies depending on the type of  
print media that you are using.  
Verify that the media guides are properly adjusted.  
Check that the input tray is securely in place.  
Do not add print media into the input tray while the product is printing.  
Use only HP-recommended media types and sizes. See Paper and print media on page 53 for  
more information about print media types.  
Do not fan media prior to loading it in a tray. To loosen the ream, hold it firmly in both hands and  
twist the media by rotating your hands in the opposite direction.  
Do not let print media stack up in the output bin. The print media type and the amount of toner used  
affect the output bin capacity.  
Check the power connection. Make sure that the power cord is firmly connected to both the product  
and the power supply box. Plug the power cord into a grounded power outlet.  
ENWW  
Clear jams 201  
   
Solve image-quality problems  
Print problems  
Print quality problems  
Occasionally, you might encounter problems with print quality. The information in the following sections  
helps you identify and resolve these issues.  
NOTE: If you are having copy problems, see Copy problems on page 210.  
General print quality issues  
The following examples depict Letter-size paper that has passed through the product short-edge first.  
These examples illustrate problems that would affect all of the pages that you print, whether you print  
in color or in black only. The topics that follow list the typical cause and solution for each of these  
examples.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Print is light or faded.  
The media might not meet  
HP specifications.  
Use media that meets HP specifications.  
One or more print cartridges might be  
defective.  
Print the Supplies status page to check  
the remaining life. See Information pages  
Replace any low print cartridges. See  
The product is set to override the  
Replace any low print cartridges. See  
Replace [color] cartridge message and Print cartridge on page 176.  
to continue printing.  
Toner specks appear.  
The media might not meet HP  
specifications.  
Use media that meets HP specifications.  
The paper path might need cleaning.  
Clean the paper path. See Clean the  
Dropouts appear.  
A single sheet of print media might be  
defective.  
Try reprinting the job.  
The moisture content of the paper is  
Try different paper, such as high-quality  
uneven or the paper has moist spots on paper that is intended for color laser  
its surface.  
printers.  
The paper lot is flawed. The  
manufacturing processes can cause  
some areas to reject toner.  
Try different paper, such as high-quality  
paper that is intended for color laser  
printers.  
202 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
           
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Vertical streaks or bands appear on the One or more print cartridges might be  
Print the Supplies status page to check  
page.  
defective.  
Replace any low print cartridges. See  
C
C
C
C
A
A
A
A
A
a
B
B
B
B
c
c
c
c
c
b
b
b
b
a
a
a
a
The product is set to override the  
Replace any low print cartridges. See  
Replace [color] cartridge message and Print cartridge on page 176.  
to continue printing.  
B C  
b
The amount of background toner  
shading becomes unacceptable.  
Very dry (low humidity) conditions can  
increase the amount of background  
shading.  
Check the device environment.  
One or more print cartridges might be  
defective.  
Replace any low print cartridges. See  
The product is set to override the  
Replace any low print cartridges. See  
Replace [color] cartridge message and Print cartridge on page 176.  
to continue printing.  
Toner smears appear on the media.  
The media might not meet HP  
specifications.  
Use media that meets HP specifications.  
If toner smears appear on the leading  
edge of the paper, the media guides are  
dirty, or debris has accumulated in the  
print path.  
Clean the media guides.  
Clean the paper path. See Clean the  
The toner smears easily when touched. The device is not set to print on the type In the printer driver, select the Paper tab  
of media on which you want to print.  
and set Type is to match the type of  
media on which you are printing. Print  
speed might be slower if you are using  
heavy paper.  
The media might not meet HP  
specifications.  
Use media that meets HP specifications.  
The paper path might need cleaning.  
Clean the paper path. See Clean the  
ENWW  
Solve image-quality problems 203  
       
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Marks repeatedly appear at even  
The device is not set to print on the type In the printer driver, select the Paper tab  
intervals on the printed side of the page. of media on which you want to print.  
and set Type is to match the type of  
paper on which you are printing. Print  
speed might be slower if you are using  
heavy paper.  
Internal parts might have toner on them. The problem typically corrects itself after  
a few more pages.  
The paper path might need cleaning.  
Clean the paper path. See Clean the  
The fuser might be damaged or dirty.  
To determine if the fuser has a problem,  
open the HP ToolboxFX and print the  
print-quality diagnostics page. See  
Contact HP Support. See the support  
flyer that came in the box.  
A print cartridge may have a problem.  
To determine which cartridge has a  
problem, open the HP ToolboxFX and  
print the print-quality diagnostics page.  
Marks repeatedly appear at even  
intervals on the unprinted side of the  
page.  
Internal parts might have toner on them. The problem typically corrects itself after  
a few more pages.  
The paper path might need cleaning.  
Clean the paper path. See Clean the  
The fuser might be damaged or dirty.  
To determine if the fuser has a problem,  
open the HP ToolboxFX and print the  
print-quality diagnostics page. See  
Contact HP Support. See the support  
flyer that came in the box.  
The printed page contains misformed  
characters.  
The media might not meet HP  
specifications.  
Use a different paper, such as high-  
quality paper that is intended for color  
laser printers.  
If characters are incorrectly formed so  
Verify that the problem also occurs on  
that they produce a wavy effect, the laser the Configuration page. If so, contact  
scanner might need service.  
HP Support. See the support flyer that  
came in the box.  
204 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
 
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
The printed page is curled or wavy.  
The device is not set to print on the type In the printer driver, select the Paper tab  
of media on which you want to print.  
and set Type is to match the type of  
paper on which you are printing. Print  
speed might be slower if you are using  
heavy paper.  
The Service menu item Less paper  
curl is set to Off.  
Use the control-panel menus to change  
the setting. See Control-panel menus  
The media might not meet HP  
specifications.  
Use a different paper, such as high-  
quality paper that is intended for color  
laser printers.  
Both high temperature and humidity can Check the device environment.  
cause paper curl.  
Text or graphics are skewed on the  
printed page.  
The media might be loaded incorrectly.  
Make sure that the paper or other print  
media is loaded correctly and that the  
media guides are not too tight or too  
loose against the stack. See Load paper  
The media might not meet HP  
specifications.  
Use a different paper, such as high-  
quality paper that is intended for color  
laser printers.  
The printed page contains wrinkles or  
creases.  
The media might be loaded incorrectly.  
Verify that the media is loaded correctly  
and that the media guides are not too  
tight or too loose against the stack. See  
Turn over the stack of paper in the input  
tray, or try rotating the paper 180° in the  
input tray.  
The media might not meet HP  
specifications.  
Use a different paper, such as high-  
quality paper that is intended for color  
laser printers.  
Toner appears around the printed  
characters.  
The media might be loaded incorrectly.  
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray.  
If large amounts of toner have scattered Use a different paper, such as high-  
around the characters, the paper might  
have high resistivity.  
quality paper that is intended for color  
laser printers.  
ENWW  
Solve image-quality problems 205  
       
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
An image that appears at the top of the Software settings might affect image  
In your software program, change the  
tone (darkness) of the field in which the  
repeated image appears.  
page (in solid black) repeats farther  
down the page (in a gray field).  
printing.  
In your software program, rotate the  
whole page 180° to print the lighter  
image first.  
The order of images printed might affect Change the order in which the images  
printing.  
are printed. For example, have the lighter  
image at the top of the page, and the  
darker image farther down the page.  
A power surge might have affected the  
device.  
If the defect occurs later in a print job,  
turn the device off for 10 minutes, and  
then turn on the device to restart the print  
job.  
Solve issues with color documents  
This section describes issues that can occur when you print in color.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Only black is printing when the document Color mode is not selected in your  
Select color mode instead of grayscale  
mode.  
should be printing in color.  
program or printer driver.  
The correct printer driver might not be  
selected in the program.  
Select the correct printer driver.  
The device might not be correctly  
configured.  
Print a Configuration page (see  
color appears on the Configuration page,  
contact HP Support. See the support  
flyer that came in the box.  
Sealing tape might be on the print  
cartridges.  
Verify that the sealing tape has been  
completely removed from the print  
cartridges.  
One or more colors are not printing, or  
are inaccurate.  
The media might not meet HP  
specifications.  
Use a different paper, such as high-  
quality paper that is intended for color  
laser printers.  
The device might be operating in  
excessively humid conditions.  
Verify that the device environment is  
within humidity specifications.  
One or more print cartridges might be  
defective.  
Replace any low print cartridges. See  
The product is set to override the  
Replace any low print cartridges. See  
Replace [color] cartridge message and Print cartridge on page 176.  
to continue printing.  
206 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
     
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
A color is printing inconsistently after you Another print cartridge might be  
Remove the print cartridge for the color  
load a new print cartridge.  
defective.  
that is printing inconsistently and reinstall  
it.  
The product is set to override the  
Replace any low print cartridges. See  
Replace [color] cartridge message and Print cartridge on page 176.  
to continue printing.  
The colors on the printed page do not  
The colors on your computer monitor  
match the colors as they appear on the might differ from the device output.  
screen.  
If extremely light colors or extremely dark If possible, avoid using extremely light or  
colors on screen are not printing, your  
software program might interpret  
extremely light colors as white or  
extremely dark colors as black.  
extremely dark colors.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
The media might not meet HP  
specifications.  
Use a different paper, such as high-  
quality paper that is intended for color  
laser printers.  
The finish on the printed color page is  
inconsistent.  
The media might be too rough.  
Use a smooth paper or print media, such  
as a high-quality paper that is made for  
color laser printers. Generally, smoother  
media produces better the results.  
Media-handling problems  
Use the information in this section when the product experiences media-handling problems.  
Print-media guidelines  
For best results, make sure that the paper is of good quality, and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots,  
loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, staples, and curled or bent edges.  
For best-quality printing, use a smooth type of paper. Generally, smoother media produces better  
results. .  
If you are unsure what type of paper you are loading (such as bond or recycled), check the label  
on the package of paper.  
Do not use media that is designed for inkjet printers only. Use media that is designed for laser  
printers.  
ENWW  
Solve image-quality problems 207  
   
Do not use letterhead paper that is printed with low-temperature inks, such as those used in some  
types of thermography.  
Do not use raised or embossed letterhead.  
CAUTION: Failure to follow these guidelines could cause jams or damage to the product.  
Solve print-media problems  
The following problems with media cause print-quality deviations, jamming, or even damage to the  
product.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Poor print quality or toner  
adhesion  
The paper is too moist, too rough, too heavy or Try another kind of paper, between 100 and  
too smooth, or it is embossed or from a faulty 250 Sheffield, with 4 to 6% moisture content.  
paper lot.  
Dropouts, jamming, or curl  
Excessive curl  
The paper has been stored incorrectly.  
Store paper flat in its moisture-proof wrapping.  
The paper has variability from one side to the Turn the paper over.  
other.  
The paper is too moist, has the wrong grain  
direction, or is of short-grain construction  
Open the rear output bin, or use long-grain  
paper.  
The paper varies from side-to-side.  
Turn the paper over.  
Turn on the Less paper curl setting.  
High fuser temperature is curling the paper.  
At the control panel, press Setup, use the  
arrow buttons to select Service, and then press  
OK. Use the arrow buttons to select Less paper  
curl, press OK, use the arrow buttons to select  
On, and then press OK.  
Jamming, damage to  
product  
The paper has cutouts or perforations.  
The paper has ragged edges.  
Use paper that is free of cutouts or  
perforations.  
Problems with feeding  
Use high-quality paper that is made for laser  
printers.  
The paper varies from side-to-side.  
Turn the paper over.  
The paper is too moist, too rough, too heavy or Try another kind of paper, between 100 and  
too smooth, has the wrong grain direction, or is 250 Sheffield, 4 to 6% moisture content.  
of short-grain construction or it is embossed or  
Open the rear output bin, or use long-grain  
from a faulty paper lot.  
paper.  
Print is skewed (crooked).  
The media guides might be incorrectly  
adjusted.  
Remove all media from the input tray,  
straighten the stack, and then load the media  
in the input tray again. Adjust the media guides  
to the width and length of the media that you  
are using and try printing again.  
208 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
     
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
More than one sheet feeds at The media tray might be overloaded.  
one time.  
Remove all media from the tray, and then  
return some of the media to the tray. See Load  
The media might be wrinkled, folded, or  
damaged.  
Verify that the media is not wrinkled, folded, or  
damaged. Try printing on media from a new or  
different package.  
The media might have been fanned before it  
was loaded.  
Load media that was not fanned. Loosen ream  
by twisting paper stack.  
Media might be too dry.  
Load new paper that was stored properly.  
The product does not pull  
media from the media input  
tray.  
The product might be in manual feed mode.  
If Manual feed appears on the product  
control-panel display, press OK to print  
the job.  
Verify that the product is not in manual  
feed mode and print your job again.  
The pickup roller might be dirty or damaged.  
Contact HP. See www.hp.com/support/  
CM1312series or the support flyer that came in  
the product box.  
The paper-length adjustment control in tray 2 Adjust the paper-length adjustment control to  
or optional tray 3 is set at a length that is  
greater than the media size.  
the correct length.  
Performance problems  
Try the tips in this section if pages exit the product, but have nothing printed on them, or when the product  
does not print any pages.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Pages print but are totally  
blank.  
The sealing tape might still be in the print  
cartridges.  
Verify that the sealing tape has been  
completely removed from the print cartridges.  
The document might contain blank pages.  
The product might be malfunctioning.  
Certain media types can slow the print job.  
Check the document that you are printing to  
see if content appears on all of the pages.  
To check the product, print a configuration  
Print on a different type of media.  
ENWW  
Solve image-quality problems 209  
   
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Pages did not print.  
The product might not be pulling media  
correctly.  
The media might be jamming in the product.  
Clear the jam. See Clear jams on page 195.  
The USB cable or the network cable might be  
defective or incorrectly connected.  
Disconnect the cable at both ends and  
reconnect it.  
Try printing a job that has printed in the  
past.  
Try using a different USB or network  
cable.  
The product IP address might have been  
changed.  
From the control panel, print a configuration  
page. Confirm the IP address with that listed in  
the Properties dialog box.  
The product might not be set up as the default Open the Printers or Printers and Faxes  
printer.  
dialog box, right click the product, and then  
click Set as Default Printer.  
The product might have encountered an error. Check the control panel for an error message.  
The product might be paused or offline.  
Open the Printers or Printers and Faxes  
dialog box, and verify that the product status is  
Ready. If it is Paused, right-click the product  
and click Resume Printing.  
The product might not be receiving power.  
Check the power cord and verify that the  
product is turned on.  
Other devices are running on your computer. The product might not share a USB port. If you  
have an external hard drive or network  
switchbox that is connected to the same port  
as the product, the other device might be  
interfering. To connect and use the product,  
disconnect the other device or use two USB  
ports on the computer.  
Copy problems  
Prevent copy problems  
The following are a few simple steps you can take to improve copy quality:  
Copy from the flatbed scanner. This will produce a higher quality copy than copying from the  
automatic document feeder (ADF).  
Use quality originals.  
Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew, causing unclear images  
and problems with the OCR program. See Load paper and print media on page 58 for instructions.  
Adjust the control panel settings for the type of original if the automatic settings do not produce the  
desired result.  
210 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
     
NOTE: Verify that the media meets HP specifications. If the media meets HP specifications, recurring  
feed problems indicate the pickup roller or separation pad is worn. Contact HP. See www.hp.com/  
support/CM1312series or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
Image problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Copy edges are cropped when  
copying from the glass  
The original is edge-to-edge or has smaller Position the original 6.35 mm (1/4 inch)  
margins than those supported by this  
product.  
away from the registration corner on the  
glass.  
Copy edges are cropped when  
copying from the ADF  
The original is too long, edge-to-edge, or has On the control panel, press Copy setup. Use  
smaller margins than those supported by  
this product.  
the arrow buttons to select Reduce/  
Enlarge and press OK. Use the arrow  
buttons to select Full Page=91% and press  
OK. Try copying again.  
Images are missing or faded.  
The print-cartridge might be low.  
Replace any low print cartridge and then  
calibrate the product. See Print cartridge  
The original might be of poor quality.  
If your original is too light or damaged, the  
copy might not be able to compensate, even  
if you adjust the contrast. If possible, find an  
original document in better condition.  
Use the control-panel to change the contrast  
setting.  
The original might have a colored  
background.  
Colored backgrounds might cause images in  
the foreground to blend into the background,  
or the background might appear in a  
different shade. If possible, use an original  
document without a colored background.  
The original is larger than the scanable area Use supported media sizes.  
Vertical white or faded stripes  
appear on the copy.  
The media might not meet  
HP specifications.  
Use media that meets HP specifications.  
One or more of the print cartridges may be Replace any low print cartridge. See Print  
low.  
If the error persists, contact HP support.  
Unwanted lines appear on copy  
jobs only.  
The flatbed scanner or the ADF glass might Clean the flatbed scanner or the ADF glass.  
An image exists on the back of the original, On the flatbed scanner, place three sheets  
or defects exist on the scanner cover.  
of clean paper on top of the original, close  
the flatbed scanner cover, then re-scan the  
original.  
C
C
C
C
A
a
A
a
A
a
A
a
A
a
B
B
B
B
c
c
c
c
c
b
b
b
b
B C  
b
ENWW  
Solve image-quality problems 211  
     
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Black dots or streaks appear on  
copy jobs only.  
Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted  
substance might be on the automatic  
document feeder (ADF) or flatbed scanner.  
Clean the product. See Clean the product  
Copies are too light or dark.  
The printer driver or product software  
settings may be incorrect.  
Verify that the quality settings are correct.  
See the product software Help for more  
information about changing the settings.  
The product may not be calibrated.  
Calibrate the product.  
Text is unclear.  
The printer driver or product software  
settings may be incorrect.  
Verify that the quality settings are correct.  
See the product software Help for more  
information about changing the settings.  
The original is of poor quality.  
Try copying another document. If the copy is  
free of defects, obtain a better-quality  
original.  
The product may not be calibrated.  
Calibrate the product.  
Media-handling problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Poor print quality or toner  
adhesion  
The paper is too moist, too rough, too heavy Try another kind of paper, between 100 and  
or too smooth, or it is embossed or from a  
faulty paper lot.  
250 Sheffield, 4 to 6% moisture content.  
Dropouts, jamming, or curl  
The paper has been stored incorrectly.  
Store paper flat in its moisture-proof  
wrapping.  
The paper has variability from one side to the Turn the paper over.  
other.  
Excessive curl  
The paper is too moist, has the wrong grain Open the rear output bin, or use long-grain  
direction, or is of short-grain construction  
The paper varies from side-to-side.  
The paper has cutouts or perforations.  
paper.  
Turn the paper over.  
Jamming, damage to paper  
Problems with feeding  
Use paper that is free of cutouts or  
perforations.  
The paper has ragged edges.  
Use high-quality paper that is made for laser  
printers.  
The paper varies from side-to-side.  
Turn the paper over.  
The paper is too moist, too rough, too heavy Try another kind of paper, between 100 and  
or too smooth, has the wrong grain direction, 250 Sheffield, 4 to 6% moisture content.  
or is of short-grain construction or it is  
Open the rear output bin, or use long-grain  
embossed or from a faulty paper lot.  
paper.  
Print is skewed (crooked).  
The media guides might be incorrectly  
adjusted.  
Remove all media from the input tray,  
straighten the stack, and then load the  
media in the input tray again. Adjust the  
media guides to the width and length of the  
media that you are using and try printing  
again.  
212 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
   
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
More than one sheet feeds at one The media tray might be overloaded.  
time.  
Remove some of the media from the tray.  
The media might be wrinkled, folded, or  
damaged.  
Verify that the media is not wrinkled, folded,  
or damaged. Try printing on media from a  
new or different package.  
The product does not pull media The product might be in manual feed mode.  
from the media input tray.  
If Manual appears on the product  
control-panel display, pressOK to print  
the job.  
Verify that the product is not in manual  
feed mode and print your job again.  
The pickup roller might be dirty or damaged. Contact HP. See www.hp.com/support/  
CM1312series or the support flyer that came  
in the product box.  
The paper-length adjustment control in  
Adjust the paper-length adjustment control  
tray 2 or optional tray 3 is set at a length that to the correct length.  
is greater than the media size.  
ENWW  
Solve image-quality problems 213  
Performance problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
No copy came out.  
The input tray might be empty.  
Load media in the product. See Load paper  
information.  
The original might have been loaded  
incorrectly.  
In the automatic document feeder (ADF),  
load the original with the narrow side forward  
and the side to be scanned facing up.  
Place the original document face-down on  
the flatbed scanner with the upper-left  
corner of the document at the corner  
indicated by the icon on the scanner.  
Copies are blank.  
The sealing tape might not have been  
removed from the print cartridge.  
Remove the print cartridge from the product,  
pull out the sealing tape, and reinstall the  
print cartridge.  
The original might have been loaded  
incorrectly.  
In the ADF, load the original with the narrow  
side leading into the ADF and the side to be  
scanned facing up.  
On the flatbed scanner, make sure that the  
original document is placed face-down with  
the upper-left corner of the document at the  
lower-right corner of the glass.  
The media might not meet  
HP specifications.  
Use media that meets HP specifications.  
The wrong original was copied.  
The ADF might be loaded.  
Make sure that the ADF is empty.  
Copies are reduced in size.  
The product settings might be set to reduce On the control panel, select Reduce/  
the scanned image.  
Enlarge from the Copy Menu and verify that  
it is set to Original=100%.  
214 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
     
Scan problems  
Solve scanned-image problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
The scanned image is of poor  
quality.  
The original might be a second-generation  
photo or picture.  
To eliminate the patterns, try reducing  
the size of the image after scanning.  
Print the scanned image to see if the  
quality is better.  
Verify that the resolution settings are  
correct for the type of scan job that you  
are performing. See Scanner  
For best results, use the flatbed  
scanner for scanning rather than the  
automatic document feeder (ADF).  
The image that appears on the screen might  
not be an accurate representation of the  
quality of the scan.  
Try adjusting your computer monitor  
settings to use more colors (or levels of  
gray). Typically, you make this  
adjustment by opening Display in  
Windows Control Panel.  
Try adjusting the resolution settings in  
the scanner software. See Scanner  
The original might have been loaded  
incorrectly.  
Use the media guides when you load the  
originals into the ADF. See Load paper and  
The scanner glass might be dirty.  
Clean the scanner glass. See Clean the  
The graphics settings might not be suitable Try changing the graphics settings. See  
for the type of scan job that you are  
performing.  
ENWW  
Solve image-quality problems 215  
   
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Part of the image did not scan.  
The original might have been loaded  
incorrectly.  
Load the original on the flatbed glass or use  
the media guides when you load the  
originals into the ADF. See Load originals for  
A colored background might be causing  
images in the foreground to blend into the  
background.  
Try adjusting the settings before you scan  
the original or enhancing the image after you  
scan the original.  
The original is longer than 381 mm (15  
inches).  
The maximum scannable length is 381 mm  
(15 inches) when you use the automatic  
document feeder (ADF) input tray. If the  
page exceeds the maximum length, the  
scanner stops. (Copies can be longer.)  
CAUTION: Do not try to pull the original  
from the ADF; you might damage the  
scanner or your original. See Clear jams  
The original is too small.  
The minimum size that the flatbed scanner  
supports is 25 x 25 mm (1 x 1 inch). The  
minimum size that the ADF supports is 127  
x 127 mm (5 x 5 inches). The original might  
The media size is incorrect.  
In Scan settings, make sure that the input  
media size is large enough for the document  
that you are scanning. .  
The scan takes too long  
The resolution is set too high.  
The software is set to scan in color.  
Change the resolution settings to the correct  
settings for your job. See Scanner resolution  
The system default is color, which takes  
longer to scan even when scanning a  
monochrome original. If you acquire an  
image through TWAIN or WIA, you can  
change the settings so that the original  
scans in grayscale or black-and-white. See  
the product software Help for details.  
A print job or copy job was sent before you If someone sent a print job or copy job before  
tried to scan.  
you tried to scan, the scan will start if the  
scanner is not busy. However, because the  
product and scanner share memory, the  
scan might be slower.  
The scanning PC may not have enough  
available resources.  
Close unused applications on the PC. If the  
scan is still too slow, try rebooting the  
scanning PC.  
Antivirus, antispyware, or firewall software  
on the scanning PC may slow scanning.  
Consult your antivirus, antispyware, or  
firewall software documentation.  
216 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
 
Scan-quality problems  
Prevent scan-quality problems  
The following are a few simple steps you can take to improve copy and scan quality.  
Use the flatbed scanner, rather than the automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray, to scan.  
Use high-quality originals.  
Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew, which causes unclear  
images. See Load paper and print media on page 58 for instructions.  
Adjust the software settings according to how you plan to use the scanned page. See Scanner  
resolution and color on page 100 for more information.  
If your product frequently feeds more than one page at a time, the separation pad might need to  
be replaced. Contact HP. See www.hp.com/support/CM1312series or the support flyer that came  
in the product box.  
Solve scan-quality problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Blank pages  
The original might have been loaded upside In the automatic document feeder (ADF), put  
down.  
the top end of the stack of originals into the  
ADF input tray, with the media stack face-up  
and the first page to be scanned on top of  
the stack.  
Place the original document face-down on  
the flatbed scanner with the upper-left  
corner of the document at the corner  
indicated by the icon on the scanner.  
Too light or dark  
The resolution and color levels may be set  
incorrectly.  
Verify that you have the correct resolution  
and color settings. See Scanner resolution  
Unwanted lines  
The ADF glass might be dirty.  
Clean the ADF glass. See Clean the scanner  
glass on page 78 (step 3).  
Black dots or streaks  
Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted  
substance might be on the glass.  
Clean the flatbed scanner surface. See  
The power to the product might have  
fluctuated.  
Reprint the job.  
Unclear text  
The resolution levels might be set  
incorrectly.  
Verify that the correct resolution settings are  
The media is not laying flat on the glass.  
Close the scanner lid tightly.  
ENWW  
Solve image-quality problems 217  
     
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Communication errors on the PC One or more of the printer cables is loose.  
Check the printer cables and make sure they  
are plugged in securely.  
The product is not on.  
Turn the product on.  
If the product is connected through a  
Verify that the IP Address for the product is  
network, the IP address may have changed. correct.  
Antivirus, antispyware, or firewall software  
may be interfering with communication.  
Consult the antivirus, antispyware, or  
firewall software documentation.  
The product is in an error state.  
Check the product control panel and clear  
any errors by following the on-screen  
instructions.  
The product is busy with another task.  
Wait for the product to finish.  
The wrong scanner driver is selected for the Verify that the scanner driver is correct.  
product.  
The scan job does not complete. The resolution may be too high for the  
available memory on the PC.  
Try scanning at a lower resolution.  
Scan To destinations do not  
appear on the product.  
The product may have been power cycled. Wait a few minutes for the product to update  
the Scan To destinations list.  
Click Update in the Scan To setup  
application to add destinations to the  
product.  
218 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Fax problems  
To solve fax issues, see Solve fax problems on page 138.  
Optimize and improve image quality  
Print-quality checklist  
General print-quality problems can be solved by using the following checklist:  
1. Make sure that the paper or print media that you are using meets specifications. See Paper and  
print media on page 53. Generally, smoother paper provides better results.  
2. If you are using a special print media such as labels, transparencies, glossy, or letterhead, ensure  
that you have printed by type.  
3. Print a configuration page and supplies status page at the product control panel. See Information  
Check the supplies status page to see if any supplies are low or have reached their estimated  
end of life. No information is provided for non-HP print cartridges.  
If the pages do not print correctly, the problem is with the hardware. Contact HP. See  
www.hp.com/support/CM1312series or the support flyer that came in the product box.  
4. Print a demo page from HP ToolboxFX. If the page prints, the problem is with the printer driver.  
Try printing from another printer driver. For example, if you are using the PCL 6 printer driver, print  
from the PS printer driver.  
Use the Add Printer Wizard in the Printers (or Printers and Faxes in Windows XP) dialog  
box to install the PS driver.  
5. Try printing from a different program. If the page prints correctly, the problem is with the program  
from which you were printing.  
6. Restart the computer and the product and try printing again. If the problem is not resolved, see  
Manage and configure printer drivers  
Print-quality settings affect how light or dark the print is on the page and the style in which the graphics  
are printed. You can also use the print-quality settings to optimize the print quality for a specific media  
type.  
You can change the settings in the product properties to accommodate the types of jobs that you are  
printing. The following settings are available, depending on the printer driver that you are using:  
600 dpi  
Custom: This setting produces the same resolution as the default setting, but you can change the  
scale patterns.  
NOTE: Changing the resolution can change the formatting of your text.  
Temporarily change print-quality settings  
To change the print-quality settings only for the current software program, open the properties through  
the Print Setup menu in the program that you are using to print.  
ENWW  
Solve image-quality problems 219  
     
Change print-quality settings for all future jobs  
NOTE: For Macintosh instructions, see Change printer-driver settings for Macintosh on page 36.  
For Windows 2000:  
1. In the Windows system tray, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers.  
2. Right-click the product icon.  
3. Click Properties or Printing Preferences.  
4. Change the settings, and click OK.  
For Windows XP:  
1. In the Windows system tray, click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Faxes.  
2. Right-click the product icon.  
3. Click Properties, or click Printing Preferences.  
4. Change the settings, and click OK.  
For Windows Vista:  
1. In the Windows system tray, click Start, click Control Panel, and then, under Hardware and  
Sound, click Printer.  
2. Right-click the product icon.  
3. Click Properties, or click Printing Preferences.  
4. Change the settings, and click OK.  
Solve connectivity problems  
Solve direct-connection problems  
If the product is experiencing connection issues while directly connected to a computer, complete the  
following steps:  
1. Make sure that USB cable is no longer than 2 meters (6 feet).  
2. Make sure that both ends of the USB cable are connected.  
3. Make sure that the cable is a USB 2.0 Hi-Speed-certified cable.  
4. If the error persists, use a different USB cable.  
220 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
     
Network problems  
Verify that the product is on and online  
Check the following items to make sure the product is ready to print.  
1. Is the product plugged in and turned on?  
Make sure that the product is plugged in and turned on. If the problem persists, you might have a  
defective power cable, power source, or product.  
2. Is the product Ready light on?  
If the light is blinking, you might need to wait until the current job is completed.  
3. Is the product control-panel display blank?  
Make sure the product is turned on.  
Make sure the product is installed correctly.  
4. Does a message other than Ready appear on the product control-panel display?  
See your product documentation for a complete list of control panel messages and corrective  
actions.  
Resolve communication problems with the network  
Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. This information  
assumes you have already printed a network configuration page (see Information pages  
1. Are there any physical connection problems between the workstation or file server and the product?  
Verify that the network cabling, connections, and router configurations are correct. Verify that the  
network cable lengths meet network specifications.  
2. Are the network cables connected properly?  
Make sure that the product is attached to the network using the appropriate port and cable. Check  
each cable connection to make sure it is secure and in the right place. If the problem continues,  
try a different cable or ports on the hub or transceiver. The amber activity light and the green link  
status light next to the port connection on the back of the product should be lit.  
3. Are the product link speed and duplex settings set correctly?  
Hewlett-Packard recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode (the default setting).  
4. Can you "ping" the product IP address?  
Use the command prompt to ping the product from the computer. For example:  
ping 192.168.45.39  
Ensure that the ping displays round-trip times.  
If you are able to ping the product, verify that the IP address configuration for the product is correct  
on the computer. If it is correct, delete and then add the product again.  
ENWW  
Solve connectivity problems 221  
 
If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network  
settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same network.  
5. Have any software programs been added to the network?  
Make sure they are compatible and that they are installed correctly with the correct printer drivers.  
6. Are other users able to print?  
The problem may be workstation-specific. Check the workstation network drivers, printer drivers,  
and redirection.  
7. If other users are able to print, are they using the same network operating system?  
Check your system for proper network operating system setup.  
8. Is your protocol enabled?  
Check the status of your protocol on the network configuration page. See Information pages  
on page 158. You can also use the embedded Web server or HP ToolboxFX to check the status  
of other protocols. See HP ToolboxFX on page 160.  
222 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
Solve software problems  
Solve common Windows problems  
Error message:  
"General Protection FaultException OE"  
"Spool32"  
"Illegal Operation"  
Cause  
Solution  
Close all software programs, restart Windows, and try again.  
Select a different printer driver. If the device PCL 6 printer  
driver is selected, switch to the PCL 5 or HP postscript level 3  
emulation printer driver, which can be done from a software  
program.  
Delete all temp files from the Temp subdirectory. Determine  
the name of the directory by opening the AUTOEXEC.BAT file  
and looking for the statement "Set Temp =". The name after  
this statement is the Temp directory. It is usually C:\TEMP by  
default, but can be redefined.  
See the Microsoft Windows documentation that came with the  
computer for more information about Windows error  
messages.  
Solve common Macintosh problems  
Table 15-2 Problems with Mac OS X v10.3 and Mac OS X v10.4  
The printer driver is not listed in Printer Setup Utility.  
Cause  
Solution  
The product software might not have been installed or was installed Make sure that the PPD is in the following hard drive folder:  
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/  
<lang>.lproj  
incorrectly.  
, where “<lang>” represents the two-letter language code for the  
language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software. See  
the getting started guide for instructions.  
The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.  
Delete the PPD file from the following hard drive folder:  
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/  
<lang>.lproj  
, where “<lang>” represents the two-letter language code for the  
language that you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting  
started guide for instructions.  
ENWW  
Solve software problems 223  
               
Table 15-2 Problems with Mac OS X v10.3 and Mac OS X v10.4 (continued)  
The product name, IP address, or “Rendezvous” or “Bonjour” host name does not appear in the printer list box in the Printer Setup  
Utility.  
Cause  
Solution  
The product might not be ready.  
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the product is on,  
and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or  
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different  
port.  
The wrong product name, IP address, or "Rendezvous" or "Bonjour" Check the product name, IP address, or "Rendezvous" or "Bonjour"  
host name is being used.  
host name by printing a configuration page See Information pages  
on page 158. Verify that the name, IP address, or "Rendezvous" or  
"Bonjour" host name on the configuration page matches the product  
name, IP address, or "Rendezvous" or "Bonjour" host name in the  
Printer Setup Utility.  
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.  
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.  
A print job was not sent to the product that you wanted.  
Cause  
Solution  
The print queue might be stopped.  
Open the print queue, and then click Start Jobs.  
The wrong product name or IP address is being used. Another  
Check the product name, IP address, or "Rendezvous" or "Bonjour"  
product with the same or similar name, IP address, or "Rendezvous" host name by printing a configuration page See Information pages  
or "Bonjour" host name might have received your print job.  
on page 158. Verify that the name, IP address, or "Rendezvous" or  
"Bonjour" host name on the configuration page matches the product  
name, IP address, or "Rendezvous" or "Bonjour" host name in the  
Printer Setup Utility.  
An encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file does not print with the correct fonts.  
Cause  
Solution  
This problem occurs with some programs.  
Try downloading the fonts that are contained in the EPS file to  
the product before printing.  
Send the file in ASCII format instead of binary encoding.  
You are unable to print from a third-party USB card.  
Cause  
Solution  
This error occurs when the software for USB printers is not  
installed.  
When adding a third-party USB card, you might need the Apple USB  
Adapter Card Support software. The most current version of this  
software is available from the Apple Web site.  
224 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
     
Table 15-2 Problems with Mac OS X v10.3 and Mac OS X v10.4 (continued)  
When connected with a USB cable, the product does not appear in the Macintosh Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected.  
Cause  
Solution  
This problem is caused by either a software or a hardware  
component.  
Software troubleshooting  
Check that your Macintosh supports USB.  
Verify that your Macintosh operating system is Mac OS X v10.3  
or Mac OS X v10.4.  
Ensure that your Macintosh has the appropriate USB software  
from Apple.  
Hardware troubleshooting  
Check that the product is turned on.  
Verify that the USB cable is connected correctly.  
Check that you are using the appropriate high-speed USB cable.  
Ensure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing  
power from the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the  
chain, and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host  
computer.  
Check to see if more than two nonpowered USB hubs are  
connected in a row on the chain. Disconnect all of the devices  
from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on  
the host computer.  
NOTE: The iMac keyboard is a nonpowered USB hub.  
Solve PostScript (PS) errors  
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several product languages are  
being used.  
NOTE: To receive a printed or screen displayed message when PS errors occur, open the Print  
Options dialog box and click the selection next to the PS Errors section. You can also use the embedded  
Web server.  
Table 15-3 PS errors  
Issue  
Cause  
Solution  
The job prints in Courier (the product's  
default typeface) instead of the typeface downloaded. A personality switch may  
you requested.  
The requested typeface is not  
Download the desired font and send the  
print job again. Verify the type and  
have been performed to print a PCL job location of the font. Download to the  
just before the PS printing job was  
received.  
product if applicable. Check with the  
software documentation.  
A legal page prints with clipped margins. Print job too complex.  
You may need to print your job at  
600 dots per inch, reduce the complexity  
of the page, or install more memory.  
A PS error page prints.  
Print job may not be PS.  
Make sure the print job is a PS job. Check  
to see whether the software program  
expected a setup or PS header file to be  
sent to the product.  
ENWW  
Solve software problems 225  
 
Table 15-3 PS errors (continued)  
Issue  
Cause  
Solution  
Limit Check Error  
Print job is too complex.  
You may need to print your job at  
600 dots per inch, reduce the complexity  
of the page, or install more memory.  
VM Error  
Font Error  
Font Error  
Select unlimited downloadable fonts  
from printer driver.  
Range Check  
Select unlimited downloadable fonts  
from printer driver.  
226 Chapter 15 Problem solve  
ENWW  
A Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
227  
   
Order parts, accessories, and supplies  
Several methods are available for ordering parts, supplies, and accessories.  
Order directly from HP  
You can obtain the following items directly from HP:  
Replacement parts: To order replacement parts in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/go/hpparts.  
Outside the United States, order parts by contacting your local authorized HP service center.  
Supplies and accessories: To order supplies in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/support/  
CM1312series. To order supplies worldwide, go to www.hp.com/support/CM1312series. To order  
accessories, go to www.hp.com/support/CM1312series.  
Order through service or support providers  
To order a part or accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.  
Order directly through the HP ToolboxFX software  
HP ToolboxFX software is a product management tool designed to make product configuration,  
monitoring, supplies ordering, troubleshooting, and updating as simple and efficient as possible. For  
more information about HP ToolboxFX software, see HP ToolboxFX on page 33.  
228 Appendix A Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
         
Part numbers  
Supplies  
Product name  
Part number  
Black print cartridge  
Cyan print cartridge  
Yellow print cartridge  
Magenta print cartridge  
CB540A  
CB541A  
CB542A  
CB543A  
NOTE: For information about the yield for the cartridges, see www.hp.com/go/pageyield. Actual yield  
depends on specific use.  
Cable and interface accessories  
Product name  
Description  
Part number  
USB cable  
2-meter standard USB-compatible  
device connector  
C6518A  
3-meter standard USB-compatible  
device connector  
C6520A  
Fax cord  
Two-wire phone cord adapter  
8121-0811  
User-replaceable parts  
Product name  
Description  
Part number  
Separation pad and pickup rollers  
Replace when the product is picking up Contact HP Support to order parts.  
multiple sheets or no sheets. Trying  
different paper did not resolve the  
problem.  
Automatic document feeder (ADF)  
Replace when the ADF is damaged or  
not working correctly.  
Contact HP Support to order parts.  
ENWW  
Part numbers 229  
                 
230 Appendix A Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
B Service and support  
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement  
HP PRODUCT  
DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY  
HP LaserJet CM1312 and CM1312nfi  
One-year limited warranty  
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials  
and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects  
during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective.  
Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.  
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase,  
for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If  
HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute  
its programming instructions due to such defects.  
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a  
reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of  
the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.  
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to  
incidental use.  
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b)  
software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation  
outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or  
maintenance.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER  
WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP  
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,  
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or  
provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might  
not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from  
country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province. HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/  
region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The  
level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function  
of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory  
reasons.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR  
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS  
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL  
ENWW  
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 231  
   
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR  
OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or  
consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.  
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY  
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY  
STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.  
Customer self repair warranty service  
HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and  
allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period, HP  
identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to  
you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is  
mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs  
of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for  
Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no  
additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product.  
Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day  
delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography  
permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will  
help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether  
a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP,  
you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business  
days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping  
material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a  
customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to  
be used.  
232 Appendix B Service and support  
ENWW  
   
Print cartridge limited warranty statement  
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.  
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or  
tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or  
operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the device product or (c) exhibit wear  
from ordinary use.  
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of  
the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace  
products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO  
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR  
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE  
LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR  
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.  
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT  
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO  
THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.  
ENWW  
Print cartridge limited warranty statement 233  
 
Customer support  
Get telephone support, free during your warranty period, for  
your country/region  
Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the  
box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/.  
Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and  
problem description ready.  
Get 24-hour Internet support  
Get support for products used with a Macintosh computer  
Download software utilities, drivers, and electronic information www.hp.com/go/LJCM1312_software  
Order supplies and paper  
Order genuine HP parts or accessories  
Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements  
234 Appendix B Service and support  
ENWW  
   
Repacking the device  
If HP Support determines that your device needs to be returned to HP for repair, follow the steps below  
to repack the device before shipping it.  
CAUTION: Shipping damage as a result of inadequate packing is the customer’s responsibility.  
To repack the device  
1. Remove and retain the print cartridge.  
CAUTION: It is extremely important to remove the print cartridge before shipping the device. A  
print cartridge that remains in the device during shipping will leak and entirely cover the device  
engine and other parts with toner.  
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, avoid touching the roller on it, and store the print cartridge  
in its original packing material or so that it is not exposed to light.  
2. Remove and retain the power cable, interface cable, and optional accessories.  
3. If possible, include print samples and 50 to 100 sheets of paper or other print media that did not  
print correctly.  
4. In the U.S., call HP Support to request new packing material. In other areas, use the original packing  
material, if possible. Hewlett-Packard recommends insuring the equipment for shipment.  
ENWW  
Repacking the device 235  
 
236 Appendix B Service and support  
ENWW  
C Specifications  
This section contains the following information about the product:  
ENWW  
237  
 
Physical specifications  
Table C-1 Physical specifications  
Product  
Height  
Depth  
Width  
Weight  
HP LaserJet CM1312  
405 mm (16.0 inches)  
467 mm (18.4 inches)  
455 mm (17.9 inches)  
490 mm (19.3 inches)  
437 mm (17.2 inches)  
497 mm (19.6 inches)  
21.1 kg (46.6 lb)  
24.6 kg (54.2 lb)  
HP LaserJet  
CM1312nfi  
Electrical specifications  
CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not  
convert operating voltages. This will damage the product and void the product warranty.  
Table C-2 Electrical specifications  
Item  
110-volt models  
230-volt models  
Power requirements  
110 to 127 VAC (+/- 10%)  
50/60 Hz (+/- 3 Hz)  
4.5 A  
220 to 240 VAC (+/- 10%)  
50/60 Hz (+/- 3 Hz)  
2.5 A  
Rated current  
Power consumption  
Table C-3 Power consumption (average, in watts)1  
Product model  
Printing2  
Copying2  
Ready/Sleep3  
Off  
HP LaserJet CM1312  
300 W  
300 W  
310 W  
310 W  
7 W  
8 W  
0 W  
0 W  
HP LaserJet  
CM1312nfi  
1
2
3
4
5
Values are based on preliminary data. See www.hp.com/support/CM1312series for current information.  
Power reported is highest values measured using all standard voltages.  
Instant on fuser technology.  
Recovery time from Ready/Sleep to start of printing < 5 seconds.  
Maximum heat dissipation for all models in Ready mode = 50 BTU/hour  
238 Appendix C Specifications  
ENWW  
                 
Environmental specifications  
Table C-4 Environmental specifications1  
Recommended  
Operating  
Storage  
Temperature  
15° to 32.5° C  
(59° to 90.5° F)  
20 to 70%  
15° to 32.5° C  
(59° to 90.5° F)  
10 to 80%  
–20° to 40° C  
(–4° to 104° F)  
95% or less  
Relative humidity  
1
Values are subject to change.  
Acoustic emissions  
Table C-5 Acoustic emissions  
Sound Power Level  
Declared per ISO 92961  
Printing (12 ppm)  
LWAd = 6.1 Bels (A) [61 dB (A)]  
Ready  
Inaudible  
Sound Pressure Level - Bystander Position  
Declared per ISO 92961  
LpAm = 47 dB(A)  
Printing (12 ppm)  
Ready  
Inaudible  
1
Values are based on preliminary data. See www.hp.com/support/CM1312series for current information.  
Configuration tested: HP LaserJet CM1312 printing simplex using A4 paper at 12 ppm.  
2
ENWW  
Environmental specifications 239  
           
240 Appendix C Specifications  
ENWW  
D Regulatory information  
This section contains the following regulatory information:  
ENWW  
241  
 
FCC regulations  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant  
to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio  
frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may  
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference  
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.  
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.  
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.  
NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void  
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.  
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.  
Environmental product stewardship program  
Protecting the environment  
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound  
manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.  
Ozone production  
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).  
Power consumption  
Power usage drops significantly while in Ready/Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves  
money without affecting the high performance of this product. To determine the ENERGY STAR®  
qualification status for this product see the Product Data Sheet or Specifications Sheet. Qualified  
products are also listed at:  
Toner consumption  
Economode uses significantly less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge.  
Paper use  
This product’s manual/optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple  
pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural  
resources.  
242 Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
               
Plastics  
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to  
identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.  
HP LaserJet print supplies  
It’s easy to return and recycle your HP LaserJet print cartridges that have reached estimated end of life  
—free of charge—with HP Planet Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are  
included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on  
the environment further when you return multiple cartridges together rather than separately.  
HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally  
sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you  
participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled  
properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons  
of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be  
returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!  
NOTE: Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this  
label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty  
returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to http://www.hp.com/  
Return and recycling instructions  
United States and Puerto Rico  
The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more  
HP LaserJet print cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below.  
Multiple returns (two to eight cartridges)  
1. Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag.  
2. Tape up to eight single boxes together using strapping or packaging tape (up to 70 lbs).  
3. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.  
OR  
1. Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from the http://www.hp.com/  
recycle or 1-800-340-2445 (holds up to eight HP LaserJet print cartridges).  
2. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.  
Single returns  
1. Package the HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original bag and box.  
2. Place the shipping label on the front of the box.  
Shipping  
For all HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns, give the package to UPS during your next delivery  
or pickup, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. For the location of your local UPS drop-off  
center, call 1-800-PICKUPS or visit http://www.ups.com. If you are returning via USPS label, give the  
ENWW  
Environmental product stewardship program 243  
         
package to a U.S. Postal Service carrier or drop off at a U.S.Postal Service Office. For more information,  
or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit http://www.hp.com/recycle or call  
1-800-340-2445. Requested UPS pickup will be charged normal pickup rates. Information subject to  
change without notice.  
Non-US returns  
To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in  
the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new printer supply item) or visit  
http://www.hp.com/recycle. Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet  
printing supplies.  
Paper  
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the  
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper  
according to EN12281:2002.  
Material restrictions  
This HP product does not contain added mercury.  
This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries  
contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following:  
HP Color LaserJet CM1312 MFP Series  
Type  
Carbon monofluoride lithium  
Weight  
0.8 g  
Location  
User-removable  
On formatter board  
No  
For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle, or contact your local authorities or the  
Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org.  
244 Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
     
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the  
European Union  
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with  
your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by  
handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic  
equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will  
help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health  
and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for  
recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where  
you purchased the product.  
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)  
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner)  
can be obtained by contacting the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/hpinfo/  
For more information  
To obtain information about these environmental topics:  
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products  
HP’s commitment to the environment  
HP’s environmental management system  
HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program  
Material Safety Data Sheets  
ENWW  
Environmental product stewardship program 245  
       
Additional statements for telecom (fax) products  
EU statement for telecom operation  
This product is intended to be connected to the analog Public Switched Telecommunication Networks  
(PSTN) of European Economic Area (EEA) countries/regions. It meets requirements of EU R&TTE  
Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries appropriate CE conformity marking. For more details, see  
Declaration of Conformity issued by the manufacturer in another section of this manual. However, due  
to differences between individual national PSTNs, the product may not guarantee unconditional  
assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point. Network compatibility depends on  
the correct setting being selected by the customer in preparation of its connection to the PSTN. Please  
follow the instructions provided in the user manual. If you experience network compatibility issues,  
please contact your equipment supplier or Hewlett-Packard help desk in the country/region of operation.  
Connecting to a PSTN termination point may be the subject of additional requirements set out by the  
local PSTN operator.  
New Zealand telecom statements  
The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted  
that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement  
of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance  
that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different  
make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom’s network services.  
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the  
same line.  
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom “111” Emergency Service.  
This product has not been tested to ensure compatibility with the FaxAbility distinctive ring service for  
New Zealand.  
Telephone Consumer Protection Act (United States)  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer  
or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly  
contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the  
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or individual  
sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity,  
or individual. (The telephone number provided cannot be a 900 number or any other number for which  
charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)  
IC CS-03 requirements  
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means the equipment  
meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as  
prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirement document(s). The  
Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before installing  
this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible for the equipment to be connected to the  
facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an  
acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above  
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment  
should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made  
by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company  
246 Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
                 
cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection  
that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water  
pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution can be particularly important in rural  
areas.  
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the  
appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence Number  
(REN) of this device is 0.7.  
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication  
of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination  
on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum  
of the Ringer Equivalence Number of all the devices does not exceed five (5.0). The standard connecting  
arrangement code (telephone jack type) for equipment with direct connections to the telephone network  
is CA11A.  
ENWW  
Additional statements for telecom (fax) products 247  
Declaration of conformity  
HP LaserJet CM1312  
Declaration of Conformity  
according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1  
Manufacturer's Name:  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
DoC#: BOISB-0603-01-rel.1.0  
Manufacturer's Address:  
11311 Chinden Boulevard,  
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA  
declares, that the product  
Product Name:  
HP LaserJet CM1312 mfp  
Regulatory Model Number2)  
Product Options:  
BOISB-0603-01  
ALL  
Print Cartridges:  
CB540A, CB541A, CB542A, CB543A  
conforms to the following Product Specifications:  
SAFETY:  
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 +A11  
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)  
GB4943-2001  
CISPR22:2005 / EN55022:2006 – Class B1)  
EN 61000-3-2:2000 +A2  
EMC:  
EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1  
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2  
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B / ICES-003, Issue 4  
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003  
Supplementary Information:  
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and  
carries the CE-Marking  
accordingly.  
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.  
2) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name  
or the product number(s).  
Boise, Idaho , USA  
December 2007  
For regulatory topics only:  
European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards  
Europe,, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143), http://www.hp.com/go/  
USA Contact:  
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company,, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015, ,  
(Phone: 208-396-6000)  
HP LaserJet CM1312nfi  
Declaration of Conformity  
according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1  
Manufacturer's Name:  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
DoC#: BOISB-0603-02-rel.1.0  
Manufacturer's Address:  
11311 Chinden Boulevard,  
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA  
declares, that the product  
Product Name:  
Accessories4)  
HP LaserJet CM1312nfi mfp  
BOISB-0704-00 (US-Fax Module LIU)  
BOISB-0704-01 (EURO-Fax Module LIU)  
Regulatory Model Number2)  
BOISB-0603-02  
248 Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
     
Declaration of Conformity  
according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1  
Product Options:  
Print Cartridges:  
ALL  
CB540A, CB541A, CB542A, CB543A  
conforms to the following Product Specifications:  
SAFETY:  
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 +A11  
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)  
GB4943-2001  
CISPR22:2005 / EN55022:2006 – Class B1)  
EN 61000-3-2:2000 +A2  
EMC:  
EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1  
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2  
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B / ICES-003, Issue 4  
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003  
ES 203 021; FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 683)  
TELECOM:  
Supplementary Information:  
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the  
R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II), and carries the CE-Marking  
accordingly.  
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.  
2) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name  
or the product number(s).  
3) Telecom approvals and standards appropriate for the target countries/regions have been applied to this product, in addition to those listed  
above.  
4.) This product uses an analog fax accessory module which Regulatory Model numbers are: BOISB-0704-00 (US-LIU) or BOISB-0704-01  
(EURO LIU), as needed to meet technical regulatory requirements for the countries/regions this product will be sold.  
Boise, Idaho , USA  
December 2007  
For regulatory topics only:  
European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards  
Europe,, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143), http://www.hp.com/go/  
USA Contact:  
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company,, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015, , (Phone:  
208-396-6000)  
ENWW  
Declaration of conformity 249  
Country/region specific statements  
Laser safety  
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has  
implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is  
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product  
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard  
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the  
device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot  
escape during any phase of normal user operation.  
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified  
in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.  
Canadian DOC regulations  
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.  
« Conforme à la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». »  
EMI statement (Korea)  
Laser statement for Finland  
Luokan 1 laserlaite  
Klass 1 Laser Apparat  
HP LaserJet CM1312, CM1312nfi, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite.  
Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle.  
Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.  
VAROITUS !  
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän  
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.  
VARNING !  
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för  
osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.  
HUOLTO  
HP LaserJet CM1312, CM1312nfi - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita.  
Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi  
huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän  
250 Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
                 
käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman  
erikoistyökaluja.  
VARO !  
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa  
toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.  
VARNING !  
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig  
laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:  
Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser.  
Substances table (China)  
根据中国 子信息  
染控制管理 法的要求而出台  
污 办  
Table D-1 有毒有害物  
部件名称  
有毒有害物 和元素  
(Pb)  
(Hg)  
(Cd)  
六价 (Cr(VI))  
 
(PBB)  
二苯  
(PBDE)  
打印引擎  
X
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
印机  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
控制面板  
塑料外壳  
格式化板  
碳粉盒  
O:表示在此部件所用的所有同 材料中,所含的此有毒或有害物 均低于 SJ/T11363-2006 的限制要  
求。  
X:表示在此部件所用的所有同 材料中,至少一 所含的此有毒或有害物 高于 SJ/T11363-2006 的限  
制要求。  
NOTE: 引用的“ 保使用期限”是根据在正常温度和湿度条件下操作使用 品而确定的。  
ENWW  
Country/region specific statements 251  
 
252 Appendix D Regulatory information  
ENWW  
Index  
A
billing codes, fax  
using 119  
bins, output  
recycling 175, 243  
replacing 176  
status, checking 174  
status, viewing with HP Toolbox  
accessibility features  
accessories  
ordering 227, 228  
part numbers 229  
jams, clearing 200  
locating 4, 5  
acoustic emissions 239  
activity log, fax  
troubleshooting 148  
ad hoc groups, sending faxes  
black and white printing  
troubleshooting 206  
black and white scanning 101  
blank copies,  
troubleshooting 214  
blank pages  
storing 175  
warranty 233  
cartridges, print  
Macintosh status 41  
changing memory card default  
settings 153  
add  
scan destinations  
(Windows) 97  
ADF  
troubleshooting 209  
blank scans, troubleshooting 217  
blocking faxes 123  
books  
characters, troubleshooting 204  
cleaning  
automatic document  
feeder 181  
jams 196  
page sizes supported 144  
part number 229  
copying 80  
scanning 102  
exterior 185  
glass 185  
advanced printing options  
Windows 68  
advanced setup  
busy signals, redialing  
options 116  
lid backing 183  
paper path 179  
scanner glass 78, 184  
scanner strip 183, 185  
collating copies 76  
color  
C
fax 15  
cables  
alerts, setting up 160  
alternative letterhead mode 68  
answer mode, setting 121  
answering machines, connecting  
fax settings 120  
automatic document feeder  
loading for scanning 94  
automatic document feeder (ADF)  
capacity 72  
part numbers 229  
USB, troubleshooting 210  
calibrating color 167  
call report, fax  
troubleshooting 148  
caller-ID boxes, connecting 108  
calling cards 129  
Canadian DOC regulations 250  
cancel  
adjusting 86  
calibrating 167  
Edge Control 87  
halftone options 86  
HP ImageREt 3600 90  
managing 86  
matching 88  
Microsoft Office Basic Colors  
palette 88  
Neutral Grays 87  
print in grayscale 86  
printed vs. monitor 88  
scanning settings 101  
sRGB 87, 90  
jams 196  
scan jobs 99  
canceling  
load for copying 72  
page sizes supported 144  
part number 229  
copy jobs 74  
faxes 125  
print job 66  
autoreduction settings, fax 122  
B
cartridge-door release, locating  
cartridges  
background, gray 203  
bands, troubleshooting 203  
batteries included 244  
troubleshooting 206  
color themes 87  
HP fraud hotline 175  
part numbers 229  
ENWW  
Index 253  
 
color, scanning settings 100  
colored text  
print as black 68  
comparison, product models  
configuration page  
printing 158  
cover pages 39, 67  
creases, troubleshooting 205  
crooked pages 205, 208  
curled media 205  
custom-size copies 75  
custom-size paper settings  
Macintosh 39  
double-sided printing 41  
dpi (dots per inch)  
faxing 15  
HP ImageREt 3600 90  
scanning 100  
contrast  
specifications  
drivers  
print density 167  
contrast settings  
copy 78  
customer support  
online 234  
repacking device 235  
Macintosh settings 39  
Macintosh,  
fax 117  
control panel  
troubleshooting 223  
presets (Macintosh) 39  
settings 31, 36  
D
dark copying 212  
darkness, contrast settings  
copy 78  
cleaning page, printing 179  
HP ToolboxFX system  
settings 169  
menus 10  
messages,  
shortcuts (Windows) 67  
specifications  
supported 28  
universal 28  
fax 117  
default settings  
changing, memory card 153  
defaults, restoring 190  
delaying fax sending 135  
deleting faxes from memory 126  
demo page, printing 158  
density settings 167  
destinations, add scan  
Windows 97  
device discovery over  
network“ 47  
device polling 169  
device status  
troubleshooting 191  
settings 31, 36  
supplies status, checking  
from 174  
Windows, opening 67  
duplex printing  
Windows 68  
E
copies, number of  
Windows 68  
copy menu 25  
e-mail  
setting alerts in  
HP ToolboxFX 161  
e-mail alerts, setting up 160  
e-mail, scanning to  
Macintosh 42  
resolution settings 101  
Windows 97  
Edge Control 87  
edge-to-edge printing 79  
electrical specifications 238  
electronic faxes  
copying  
books 80  
canceling 74  
changing default number 74  
collating 76  
contrast, adjusting 78  
double-sided 83  
edge-to-edge 79  
enlarging 75  
Macintosh Services tab 41  
dial-tone detection settings 116  
dialing  
from a telephone 135  
manually 129  
light/dark settings 78  
loading ADF 72  
pauses, inserting 112  
prefixes, inserting 115  
redial manually 131  
redialing automatically,  
settings 116  
sending 133  
embedded Web server 33, 37  
embedded Web server (EWS)  
features 171  
end-of-life disposal 244  
enlarging documents  
copying 75  
environmental specifications 239  
environmental stewardship  
program 242  
EPS files, troubleshooting 224  
error messages  
loading flatbed scanner 73  
media settings 79  
media, troubleshooting 212  
mixed-size originals 83  
multiple copies 74  
one-touch 74  
tone or pulse settings 119  
troubleshooting 145  
dimensions  
photos 81  
media 55  
quality, adjusting 77  
quality, troubleshooting 211  
reducing 75  
restore default settings 80  
setup menu 10  
size, troubleshooting 214  
troubleshooting 214  
two-sided, manually 83  
disposal, end-of-life 244  
distinctive-ring settings 122  
dots per inch (dpi)  
HP ImageREt 3600 90  
control panel 191  
error messages, fax 138  
error report, fax  
specifications  
dots, troubleshooting 202  
printing 142  
254 Index  
ENWW  
error-correction setting, fax 143  
errors, PostScript 225  
EU statement for telecom  
operation 246  
European Union, waste  
disposal 245  
resolution 117, 118  
ring patterns 122  
ring type 14  
rings-to-answer 120  
security, password  
protection 172  
security, private receive 173  
send by using speed dial 131  
send log 164  
sending from a telephone 135  
sending from software 133  
speed dials 131  
fuser  
error 191  
warranty 233  
G
General Protection FaultException  
glass, cleaning 185  
glass-size setting 118  
gray background,  
event log 161  
extension phones  
receiving faxes from 124  
sending faxes from 135  
troubleshooting 203  
grayscale  
F
factory-set defaults, restoring 190  
faded print 202  
fax  
troubleshooting 206  
grayscale printing 86  
grayscale scanning 101  
group-dial entries  
stamp-received 123  
troubleshooting receiving 146  
troubleshooting sending 144  
V.34 setting 144  
ad hoc groups 130  
answer mode 14, 121  
autoreduction 122  
billing codes 119  
blocking 123  
creating 113  
editing 113  
sending faxes to 132  
volume settings 115  
fax date, setup  
use control panel 109  
fax header, setup  
H
canceling 125  
use control panel 109  
fax menu 22  
Help tab, HP ToolboxFX 164  
HP Customer Care 234  
HP Director  
scanning from (Macintosh) 41  
HP fraud hotline 175  
HP ImageREt 3600 90  
HP Toolbox FX  
contrast setting 117  
delaying sending 135  
deleting from memory 126  
detect-dial-tone settings 116  
dial prefixes 115  
dialing, tone or pulse 119  
error messages 138  
error report, printing 142  
error-correction 143  
extension phone  
fax ports, locating  
fax reports, printing 24  
Fax tab, HP ToolboxFX 162  
fax time, setup  
use control panel 109  
faxing  
from a computer  
(Macintosh) 42  
features  
Status tab 160  
HP ToolboxFX  
density settings 167  
Fax tab 162  
receiving 124  
product  
Help tab 164  
factory-set defaults,  
restoring 190  
forwarding 121  
glass-size setting 118  
group-dial entries 132  
jams, troubleshooting 195  
manual dialing 129  
pauses, inserting 112  
polling 114  
receive log 164  
receiving when you hear fax  
tones 137  
redial manually 131  
redial settings 116  
reports 24  
reports, printing all 141  
reports, troubleshooting 148  
reprinting from memory 136  
feeding problems,  
troubleshooting 209  
file, scanning to  
Macintosh 42  
Finnish laser safety  
statement 250  
firmware updates 185  
first page  
use different paper 39  
Fit to Page setting, fax 122  
flatbed scanner  
default glass-size, setting 118  
folder, scanning to 97  
fonts  
Microsoft Office Basic Colors  
palette, printing 88  
Network Settings tab 170  
opening 160  
Print Settings tab 169  
Product information tab 161  
supplies status, checking  
from 174  
System Settings tab 166  
HP Universal Print Driver 28  
HP Web Jetadmin 33, 172  
HP-UX software 34  
humidity specifications  
environment 239  
printing font lists 158  
selecting 63  
forwarding faxes 121  
fraud hotline 175  
I
IC CS-03 requirements 246  
Illegal Operation errors 223  
ENWW  
Index 255  
image quality  
L
supported operating  
systems 36  
USB card,  
copy, troubleshooting 211  
HP ImageREt 3600 90  
HP ToolboxFX settings 167  
print, troubleshooting 202,  
landscape orientation  
setting, Windows 68  
laser safety statements 250  
letterhead paper, loading 68  
lid, cleaning 183  
light copying 212  
light print, troubleshooting 202  
lightness  
troubleshooting 224  
Macintosh driver settings  
custom-size paper 39  
Services tab 41  
watermarks 40  
manual dialing 129  
manual redial 131  
matching colors 88  
material restrictions 244  
Material Safety Data Sheet  
(MSDS) 245  
scans, troubleshooting 215,  
ImageREt 3600 90  
index printing 149  
information pages  
configuration 49  
network configuration 49  
input tray  
loading media 58  
installation, software  
types (Windows) 32  
installing  
copy contrast 78  
faded print,  
troubleshooting 202  
fax contrast 117  
lines, troubleshooting  
copies 211  
media  
printed pages 203  
scans 217  
ADF, sizes supported 144  
copy settings 79  
curled, troubleshooting 205  
custom-size, Macintosh  
settings 39  
default settings 167  
default size for tray 59  
fax autoreduction settings 122  
first page 39  
link speed settings 51  
Linux 34  
Linux software 34  
loading media  
Macintosh software for direct  
connections 37  
Macintosh software on  
networks 37  
tray 1 58  
Windows software 32  
interface ports  
logs, fax  
error 142  
cables, ordering 229  
printing all 141  
troubleshooting 148  
loose toner, troubleshooting 203  
jams 195  
locating  
pages per sheet 40  
size, changing 79  
supported sizes 55  
troubleshooting 207  
type, changing 80  
wrinkled 205  
types included  
international dialing 129  
IP address  
M
Macintosh  
automatic configuration 50  
Macintosh,  
troubleshooting 224  
manual configuration 50  
protocols supported 47  
driver settings 36, 39  
drivers, troubleshooting 223  
faxing 42  
memory  
deleting faxes 126  
error messages 194  
reprinting faxes 136  
memory cards insertion 149  
memory cards, photo  
inserting 150  
faxing from 133  
installing printing system for  
direct connections 37  
installing printing system for  
networks 37  
J
jams  
ADF, clearing 196  
causes of 195  
fax, clearing 196  
locating 196  
print settings 36  
menu  
problems, solving 223  
removing software 37  
resize documents 39  
scanning from HP Director 41  
scanning page-by-page 42  
scanning to e-mail 42  
scanning to file 42  
support 234  
control panel, access 10  
copy 25  
Copy setup 10  
fax 22  
Fax setup 13  
Network config 20  
photo 24  
Photo setup 12  
Reports 12  
output-bin, clearing 200  
preventing 201  
trays, clearing 199  
Jetadmin, HP Web 33, 172  
K
Korean EMI statement 250  
Service 19  
System setup 16  
256 Index  
ENWW  
menu map  
printing 159  
operating systems, networks 46  
ordering  
HP ToolboxFX settings 168  
jams 195  
mercury-free product 244  
messages  
supplies and accessories 228  
ordering supplies  
Web sites 227  
ordering supplies and  
accessories 229  
orientation  
pages per sheet 40  
size, changing 79  
size, selecting 67  
supported sizes 55  
troubleshooting 207  
type, changing 80  
type, selecting 67  
wrinkled 205  
control panel 191  
Microsoft Office Basic Colors  
palette, printing 88  
Microsoft Word, faxing from 134  
model  
setting, Windows 68  
output bins  
comparison  
modems, connecting 107  
multiple pages per sheet  
Windows 68  
locating 4, 5  
output quality  
paper input trays  
feeding problems,  
troubleshooting 209  
part numbers  
copy, troubleshooting 211  
HP ImageREt 3600 90  
HP ToolboxFX settings 167  
print, troubleshooting 202,  
N
cables 229  
supplies 229  
n-up printing  
Windows 68  
network  
user-replaceable parts 229  
parts, user-replaceable 229  
password protection 172  
pauses, inserting 112  
PCL drivers  
universal 28  
PCL settings, HP ToolboxFX 170  
phone book, fax  
scans, troubleshooting 215,  
configuring 20, 45  
device polling 169  
IP address configuration 50  
link speed settings 51  
operating systems  
supported 46  
outside lines  
dial prefixes 115  
pauses, inserting 112  
P
product discovery 47  
protocols supported 47  
troubleshooting 221  
Network config menu 20  
network configuration page 49  
network port  
packaging device 235  
page order, changing 68  
page-by-page scanning  
(Macintosh) 42  
adding entries 131  
deleting all entries 111  
HP ToolboxFX tab 162  
importing 111  
pages  
phone numbers  
HP fraud hotline 175  
phones  
receiving faxes from 124, 137  
phones, connecting extra 108  
phones, downstream  
sending faxes from 135  
photo 149  
blank 209  
locating  
excessive curl 208  
misfeeding 208  
not printing 210  
pages per sheet  
setting up 48  
network report, printing 159  
Network Settings tab, HP  
ToolboxFX 170  
networks  
Windows 68  
HP Web Jetadmin 172  
Macintosh installation 37  
Neutral Grays 87  
New Zealand telecom  
statements 246  
paper  
photo index 149  
photo menu 24  
photo printing 149  
Photo setup menu 12  
photos  
ADF, sizes supported 144  
copy settings 79  
covers, using different  
paper 67  
noise specifications 239  
number of copies, changing 74  
curled, troubleshooting 205  
custom size, selecting 67  
custom-size, Macintosh  
settings 39  
copying 81  
memory cards, inserting 150  
printing a thumbnail  
sheetx 155  
O
online support 234  
operating environment,  
specifications 239  
operating systems supported 28,  
default settings 167  
fax autoreduction settings 122  
first and last pages, using  
different paper 67  
first page 39  
printing directly from the memory  
card 154  
scanning 104  
scanning, troubleshooting 215  
physical specifications 238  
ENWW  
Index 257  
pick-up rollers, ordering 229  
pixels per inch (ppi), scanning  
resolution 100  
polling faxes 114  
polling, device 169  
portrait orientation  
printer drivers  
Macintosh,  
troubleshooting 223  
specifications  
printing  
R
receiving faxes  
answer mode, setting 121  
autoreduction settings 122  
blocking 123  
error report, printing 142  
from extension phone 124  
log, HP ToolboxFX 164  
polling 114  
configuration page 158  
connect to a network 48  
demo page 158  
double-sided (duplex),  
Macintosh 41  
setting, Windows 68  
ports  
cables, ordering 229  
locating  
reprinting 136  
troubleshooting  
Macintosh 224  
edge-to-edge 79  
font lists 158  
Macintosh 39  
ring patterns, settings 122  
rings-to-answer settings 120  
stamp-received setting 123  
troubleshooting 146  
when you hear fax tones 137  
recycling  
HP printing supplies returns and  
environmental program 243  
recycling supplies 175  
redial  
types included  
PostScript settings, HP  
ToolboxFX 170  
PostScript, errors 225  
power  
requirements 238  
power consumption 238  
PPDs, Macintosh 223  
ppi (pixels per inch), scanning  
resolution 100  
menu map 159  
network report 159  
photos, from the memory  
card 154  
photos, thumbnails of 155  
supplies status page 158  
troubleshooting 210  
usage page 158  
manually 131  
redialing  
priority, settings 31, 36  
private receive 173  
problem solving  
Macintosh problems 223  
PostScript errors 225  
problem-solving  
Windows issues 223  
product  
model comparison  
Product information tab, HP  
ToolboxFX 161  
prefixes, dial 115  
presets (Macintosh) 39  
print cartridges  
automatically, settings 116  
reducing documents  
copying 75  
removing Macintosh software 37  
repacking device 235  
repetitive defects,  
troubleshooting 206  
replacement parts, and  
supplies 229  
replacing print cartridges 176  
reports  
door release, locating 4, 5  
HP fraud hotline 175  
Macintosh status 41  
part numbers 229  
recycling 175, 243  
replacing 176  
status, checking 174  
status, viewing with HP Toolbox protocol settings, fax 144  
storing 175  
warranty 233  
protocols, networks 47  
PS Emulation drivers 28  
pulse-dialing 119  
configuration page 12, 158  
demo page 12, 158  
fax 24  
print density settings 167  
print job  
canceling 66  
print media  
supported 55  
print on both sides  
Windows 68  
menu map 12, 159  
network report 12, 159  
PCL 6 font list 12  
PCL font list 12  
PS font list 12  
service page 12  
Q
quality  
copy settings 77  
copy, troubleshooting 211  
HP ImageREt 3600 90  
HP ToolboxFX settings 167  
print settings (Macintosh) 39  
print settings (Windows) 220  
print, troubleshooting 202,  
supplies status page 12, 158  
usage page 12, 158  
reports, fax  
print quality  
HP ImageREt 3600 90  
HP ToolboxFX settings 167  
troubleshooting 202, 219  
Print Settings tab,  
HP ToolboxFX 169  
error 142  
printing all 141  
troubleshooting 148  
scans, troubleshooting 215,  
Quick Sets 67  
258 Index  
ENWW  
reports, product  
methods 95  
shortcuts 67  
configuration page 49  
network configuration page 49  
reprinting faxes 136  
resize documents  
Macintosh 39  
page-by-page (Macintosh) 42  
photos 104  
quality, troubleshooting 215,  
size 238  
size, copy  
reducing or enlarging 75  
troubleshooting 214  
sizes, media  
resolution 100  
Windows 67  
resizing documents  
copying 75  
speed, troubleshooting 216  
to e-mail (Macintosh) 42  
to e-mail (Windows) 97  
to file (Macintosh) 42  
to file (Windows) 97  
to folder (Windows) 97  
to program (Windows) 97  
scatter, troubleshooting 205  
sending faxes  
Fit to Page setting, faxing 122  
skewed pages 205, 208  
slow speed, troubleshooting  
faxing 148  
scanning 216  
smeared toner,  
resolution  
HP ImageREt 3600 90  
scanning 100  
troubleshooting 203  
software  
specifications  
restoring factory-set defaults 190  
RGB settings 87, 90  
ring patterns 122  
direct connection installation,  
Macintosh 37  
embedded Web server 33,  
ad hoc groups 130  
billing codes 119  
canceling 125  
ring tones  
distinctive 122  
rings-to-answer setting 120  
rollers, ordering 229  
delaying 135  
error report, printing 142  
forwarding 121  
HP ToolboxFX 33, 160  
HP Web Jetadmin 33  
Linux 34  
from downstream  
telephone 135  
network installation,  
Macintosh 37  
S
safety statements 250  
scale documents  
Macintosh 39  
Windows 67  
scaling documents  
copying 75  
from software 133  
group-dial entries 132  
log, HP ToolboxFX 164  
manual dialing 129  
speed dial 131  
sending faxes 133  
settings 31, 36  
Solaris 34  
supported operating  
systems 28, 36  
uninstalling Macintosh 37  
UNIX 34  
troubleshooting 144  
separation pad, ordering 229  
service  
scan  
cancel 99  
Windows 33  
Scan to button, setting up 96  
scanner  
part numbers 229  
repacking device 235  
Service menu 19  
Service tab  
HP ToolboxFX settings 169  
Services tab  
Windows components 27  
Solaris software 34  
spare parts 229  
special media  
guidelines 57  
special paper  
glass, cleaning 78, 184  
load for copying 73  
loading for scanning 95  
strip, cleaning 185  
scanning  
Macintosh 41  
guidelines 57  
black and white 101  
blank pages,  
troubleshooting 217  
books 102  
settings  
specifications  
color 90  
acoustic emissions 239  
electrical 238  
environmental 239  
physical 238  
configuration page 49  
driver presets (Macintosh) 39  
drivers 31, 36  
color 100  
file formats 100  
from control panel 96  
from the computer 96  
grayscale 101  
HP Director (Macintosh) 41  
loading ADF 94  
loading flatbed scanner 95  
factory-set defaults,  
restoring 190  
HP ToolboxFX 166  
network configuration page 49  
network printing 48  
priority 31, 36  
product features  
specks, troubleshooting 202  
speed  
fax, troubleshooting 148  
scanning, troubleshooting 216  
speed dials  
shipping device 235  
creating 112  
ENWW  
Index 259  
deleting 113  
deleting all 111  
editing 112  
telephone numbers  
HP fraud hotline 175  
telephones  
EPS files 224  
faded print 202  
fax error-correction  
setting 143  
fax reports 148  
feeding problems 209  
jams 195  
lines, copies 211  
lines, printed pages 203  
lines, scans 217  
loose toner 203  
network configuration page,  
printing 49  
programming 131  
Spool32 errors 223  
spots, troubleshooting 202  
sRGB settings 87, 90  
status  
receiving faxes from 124, 137  
telephones, connecting extra 108  
telephones, downstream  
sending faxes from 135  
temperature specifications  
environment 239  
text, troubleshooting  
misformed characters 204  
thumbnails, photo 155  
tone-dialing 119  
alerts, HP Toolbox FX 160  
Macintosh services tab 41  
supplies, checking 174  
viewing with HP Toolbox  
Status tab, HP Toolbox FX 160  
storing  
toner  
networks 221  
loose, troubleshooting 203  
scatter, troubleshooting 205  
smeared, troubleshooting 203  
specks, troubleshooting 202  
Toolbox. See HP ToolboxFX  
transfer unit warranty 233  
trapping 87  
pages not printing 210  
pages too dark 212  
pages too light 212  
paper 207  
print quality 202  
receiving faxes 146  
repetitive defects 206  
scan quality 215, 217  
sending faxes 144  
skewed pages 205, 208  
speed, faxing 148  
text 204  
environmental  
specifications 239  
print cartridges 175  
streaks, troubleshooting 203  
supplies  
HP fraud hotline 175  
ordering 227, 228  
recycling 175, 243  
replacing print cartridges 176  
status page, printing 158  
status, checking 174  
tray  
default media size 59  
tray 1  
jams, clearing 199  
locating 4, 5  
status, viewing with HP Toolbox tray 2  
toner scatter 205  
toner smear 203  
toner specks 202  
USB cables 210  
wrinkles 205  
storing 175  
supply-status, Services tab  
Macintosh 41  
jams, clearing 199  
tray 3  
jams, clearing 199  
trays  
double-sided printing 41  
Windows 68  
two-sided printing  
Windows 68  
types, media  
support  
feeding problems,  
troubleshooting 209  
jams, clearing 199  
locating 4, 5  
online 68, 234  
repacking device 235  
supported media 55  
System Settings tab, 166  
System setup menu 16  
HP ToolboxFX settings 168  
U
settings 167  
unblocking fax numbers 123  
uninstalling Macintosh  
software 37  
universal print driver 28  
UNIX 34  
UNIX software 34  
usage page, printing 158  
USB port  
troubleshooting  
blank pages 209  
blank scans 217  
checklist 188  
T
TCP/IP  
operating systems  
supported 46  
protocols supported 47  
technical support  
online 234  
repacking device 235  
Telephone Consumer Protection  
Act 246  
color 206  
configuration page,  
printing 49  
control panel messages 191  
copy quality 211  
copy size 214  
copying 214  
curled media 205  
dialing 145  
locating  
Macintosh installation 37  
troubleshooting 210  
260 Index  
ENWW  
troubleshooting  
Macintosh 224  
Word, faxing from 134  
wrinkles, troubleshooting 205  
type included  
user-replaceable parts 229  
V
V.34 setting 144  
vertical lines,  
troubleshooting 203  
vertical white or faded  
stripes 211  
voltage requirements 238  
volume  
settings 18  
volume, adjusting 115  
W
warranty  
Customer self repair 232  
print cartridge 233  
product 231  
transfer unit and fuser 233  
watermarks  
Windows 67  
wavy paper, troubleshooting 205  
Web sites  
customer support 234  
HP Web Jetadmin,  
downloading 172  
Macintosh customer  
support 234  
Material Safety Data Sheet  
(MSDS) 245  
ordering supplies 227, 228  
universal print driver 28  
weight 238  
white or faded stripes,  
troubleshooting 211  
Windows  
add scan-to destinations 97  
driver settings 31  
drivers supported 28  
faxing from 133  
problem-solving issues 223  
scanning to e-mail 97  
scanning to folder 97  
software components 27, 33  
supported operating  
systems 28  
universal print driver 28  
ENWW  
Index 261  
262 Index  
ENWW  
*CC430-90975*  
*CC430-90975*  
CC430-90975  

AGFA 1815 Copier User Manual
Champion Manufacturing Air Conditioner 60 User Manual
Clarion Automobile Accessories PN 2083I User Manual
Daewoo DWA 122CS User Manual
Friedrich CP18F30 User Manual
Friedrich EL36 User Manual
Friedrich WALLMASTER WY12 User Manual
Frymaster HCFU 42HF03 User Manual
Haynes Manuals Automobile Accessories 36034 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard LaserJet 3392 All in One User Manual